Rückenbreite 10 – 20 mm

Building Automation

E-Mail: info@moeller.net
Internet: www.moeller.net© 2002 by Moeller GmbH
Subject to alteration
AWB2528-1423GB Doku/Doku/Eb 08/04
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany (xx/xx)
Article No.: 262671

A
A

Think future. Switch to green.

Systems

User Manual
easy800

Moeller GmbH
Industrieautomation
Hein-Moeller-Straße 7–11
D-53115 Bonn

Industrial Automation

easy800
Control Relay
08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

A

Think future. Switch to green.

Rückenbreite festlegen! (1 Blatt = 0,106 mm)

All brand and product names are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of the owner concerned.

1st published 2002, edition date 05/02
2nd edition 11/2002
3rd edition 06/2003
4th edition 08/2004
See revision protocol in the “About this manual“ chapter© Moeller GmbH, 53105 Bonn
Author:
Editor:Translator:

Dieter Bauerfeind
Heidrun Riege
Terence Osborn, David Long

All rights reserved, including those of the translation.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form
(printed, photocopy, microfilm or any other process) orprocessed, duplicated or distributed by means of electronicsystems without written permission of Moeller GmbH, Bonn.
Subject to alteration without notice.

Warning!
Dangerous electrical voltage!

Before commencing the installation• Disconnect the power supply of the device. • Suitable safety hardware and software
measures should be implemented for the• Ensure that devices cannot be accidentally
I/O interface so that a line or wire breakage
restarted.
on the signal side does not result in• Verify isolation from the supply.
undefined states in the automation
devices.
• Earth and short circuit.
• Cover or enclose neighbouring units thatare live.
• Follow the engineering instructions (AWA)of the device concerned.
• Only suitably qualified personnel inaccordance with EN 50110-1/-2(VDE 0105 Part 100) may work on thisdevice/system.
• Before installation and before touching
the device ensure that you are free ofelectrostatic charge.
• The functional earth (FE) must beconnected to the protective earth (PE) or
to the potential equalisation. The systeminstaller is responsible for implementing
this connection.
• Connecting cables and signal lines should
be installed so that inductive or capacitive
interference does not impair the
automation functions.

• Deviations of the mains voltage from therated value must not exceed the tolerance
limits given in the specifications, otherwise
this may cause malfunction and dangerous
operation.
• Emergency stop devices complying with
IEC/EN 60204-1 must be effective in all
operating modes of the automation
devices. Unlatching the emergency-stop
devices must not cause restart.
• Devices that are designed for mounting in
housings or control cabinets must only be
operated and controlled after they havebeen installed with the housing closed.
Desktop or portable units must only be
operated and controlled in enclosed
housings.

Moeller GmbH
Safety instructions• Install automation devices and related
operating elements in such a way that they
are well protected against unintentional
operation.

• Ensure a reliable electrical isolation of the
low voltage for the 24 volt supply. Onlyuse power supply units complying withIEC 60364-4-41 (VDE 0100 Part 410) or
HD 384.4.41 S2.

I• Measures should be taken to ensure theproper restart of programs interrupted
after a voltage dip or failure. This should
not cause dangerous operating states evenfor a short time. If necessary, emergencystop devices should be implemented.

II• Wherever faults in the automation system
may cause damage to persons or property,
external measures must be implemented toensure a safe operating state in the eventof a fault or malfunction (for example, bymeans of separate limit switches,mechanical interlocks etc.).

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contents

About This ManualDevice designation
Reading conventions
List of revisions

9
9
10
11

1

easy800
Target readership
Proper use– Improper use
Overview
Device overview– easy basic units at a glance– easy800 type references
easy operation– Buttons– Moving through menus and choosing values– Selecting main and system menu
– easy800 status display– Status display for local expansion– easy800 advanced Status display– easy800 LED display– Menu structure– Selecting or toggling between menu items– Cursor display– Setting values

15
15
15
15
16
18
18
19
20
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
24
29
30
30

2

Installation
Mounting
Connecting the expansion device
Terminals– Tools– Cable cross-sections
Network cables and plug
Connecting the power supply– DC basic units– Cable protection

31
31
34
35
35
35
35
35
38
39
1

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contents

32

Connecting the inputs– Connecting the AC inputs– Connecting the easy-DC
Connecting the outputs
Connecting relay outputs– EASY8....-RC..
– EASY6..-..RE..
– EASY2..-RE
Connecting transistor outputs– EASY8..-DC-TC, EASY6..-DC-TE
Connecting analog outputs– Connecting servo valves– Setpoint entry for a drive
Connecting the NET network– Accessories– Cable length and cross-sections– Plugging and unplugging network cables
Expanding inputs/outputs– Local expansion– Remote expansion

39
39
44
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
55
55
56
56
56
58
60
62
63
64

Commissioning
Switching on
Setting the menu language
easy operating modes
Creating your first circuit diagram– Starting point Status display– Circuit diagram display– From the first contact to the output coil
– Wiring– Testing the circuit diagram– Deleting the circuit diagram– Fast circuit diagram entry
Configuring an easy-NET network– Entering the network station number– Entering network stations– Configuring an easy-NET network– Changing the easy-NET network configuration– Displaying the Status display of other stations

65
65
65
66
67
69
70
71
72
74
77
77
78
79
80
81
82
83

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contents

4

Wiring with easy800
easy800 operation– Buttons for drawing circuit diagrams andfunction block usage– Operation– Usable relays and function blocks (coils)– Markers, analog operands– Number formats– Circuit diagram display– Saving and loading programs
Working with contacts and relays– Creating and modifying connections– Inserting and deleting a circuit connection– Saving circuit diagrams– Aborting circuit diagram entry– Searching for contacts and coils– “Go to” a circuit connection– Deleting the rung
– Switching via the cursor buttons– Checking the circuit diagram– Function block editor– Checking function blocks– Coil functions
Function blocks– Analog value comparator/
threshold value switch– Arithmetic function block– Data block comparator– Data block transfer– Boolean operation– Counters– High-speed counters– Frequency counter– High-speed counters– High-speed incremental encoder counters– Comparators– Text output function block– Data function block– PID controller– Signal smoothing filter

85
85
85
86
94
97
99
100
101
103
106
108
109
109
109
110
110
111
112
113
117
118
123
125
128
132
139
150
153
159
160
164
170
175
177
181
183
189
3

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contents– GET, fetch a value from the network– Seven-day time switch– Year time switch– Value scaling– Jumps– Master reset– Numerical converters– Operating hours counter– PUT, send a value onto the network– Pulse width modulation– Setting date/time– Set cycle time
– Timing relay– Value limitation– Example with timing relay andcounter function block
5

4

192
194
200
204
208
211
212
218
219
221
224
226
228
241
243

easy-NET network
247
Introduction to easy-NET
247
easy-NET network topologies, addressing andfunctions248– Loop through the unit wiring method248– T connector and spur line
248
– Topology and addressing examples
249– Position and addressing of the operands
via easy-NET
250– Functions of the stations in the network
252– Possible write and read authorisation in
the network
252
Configuration of the easy-NET network
253– Station number
253– Transmission speed
253– Pause time, changing the write repetition ratemanually
254– Send each change on the inputs/outputs(SEND IO)
255
– Automatic change of the RUN and STOP mode 255– Input/output device (REMOTE IO) configuration 256– Displaying the Status display of other stations 257– Station message types
258

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contents– Transfer behaviour– Signs of life of the individual stations anddiagnostics– Network transmission security
6

258
259
262

easy Settings
263
Password protection
263– Password setup
264– Selecting the scope of the password
265– Activating the password
266– Unlocking easy
267
– Changing or deleting the password range
268
Changing the menu language
270
Changing parameters271– Adjustable parameters for function blocks
272
Setting date, time and daylight saving time273
Changing between winter/summer time (DST)274– Selecting DST
275
Activating input delay (debounce)276– Deactivating debounce (input delay)
276
Activating and deactivating the P buttons
277– Activating the P buttons
277– Deactivating the P buttons
278
Startup behaviour
278– Setting the startup behaviour
278– Behaviour when the circuit diagram is deleted 279– Behaviour during upload/download tocard or PC
279– Possible faults
280– Card startup behaviour
280
Setting LCD contrast and backlight281
Retention
283– Requirements
284– Setting retentive behaviour
284– Deleting ranges
285– Deleting retentive actual values of markers andfunction blocks
285– Transferring retentive behaviour
286
Displaying device information
287
5

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contents

76Inside easy
easy Program cycle– How easy evaluates the high-speed counters
CF, CH and CI 292
Delay times for inputs and outputs– Delay times with easy-DC basic units– Delay time with easy AC basic units– Behaviour with and without delay time
Monitoring of short-circuit/overload with
EASY..-D.-T..
Expanding easy800– How is an expansion unit recognised?
– Transfer behaviour– Function monitoring of expansion units
QA analog output– Behaviour with assignment of values
exceeding 1023
Loading and saving programs– EASY…-..-..XMFD without display and keypad– Program compatibility of the hardware– Interface– COM connection– Terminal mode
– Memory card
– EASY-SOFT (-PRO)
Compatibility of different easy800 versions.
– Device compatibility
Device version

289
289

292
293
294
295
297
299
299
300
300
302
302
303
303
303
304
304
304
305
308
310
310
311

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contents

Appendix313
Technical data313
– General313– Power supply
318– Inputs319– Relay outputs
324– Transistor outputs
326– Analog output329– easy-NET Network
330
List of the function blocks
332– Function blocks
332– Function block coils
333– Function block contacts
334– Function block inputs (constants, operands)
335– Function block output (operands)
336– Other operands
336
Memory space requirement
337– Optimization of the memory space requirement 338
Index

339

7

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB8

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

About This ManualThis manual describes the installation, commissioning andprogramming (circuit-diagram generation) of the easy800
control relay.
A specialist knowledge of electrical engineering is needed
for commissioning and creating circuit diagrams. When
active components such as motors or pressure cylinders arecontrolled, parts of the system can be damaged and persons
put at risk if easy is connected or programmed incorrectly.

Device designation

This manual uses the following abbreviated designations fordifferent easy models:• easy800 for– EASY819-..,– EASY820-..,– EASY821-..,– EASY822-..
• easy412 for– EASY412-AC-…,– EASY412-D.-…
• easy600 for– EASY6..-AC-RC(X)– EASY..-DC-.C(X)9

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

About This Manual• easy-AC for– EASY8..-AC-…
– EASY412-AC-..
– EASY6..-AC-RC(X)• easy-DC for– EASY8..-.DC-…
– EASY12-DC-..
– EASY620/621-DC-.C(X)• easy-DA for
EASY412-DA-RC

Reading conventions

Symbols used in this manual have the following meanings:
X Indicates actions to be taken.

h
i
j
h

Attention!
Warns of the possibility of light damage.
Caution!
Warns of the possibility of serious damage and slight
injury.
Warning!
Warns of the possibility of substantial damage, serious
injury or death.
Indicates interesting tips and additional information
For greater clarity, the name of the current chapter is shownin the header of the left-hand page and the name of thecurrent section in the header of the right-hand page. Pages
at the start of a chapter and empty pages at the end of achapter are exceptions.

10

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

List of revisions

List of revisions
EditionPage

Description

New

Modification

08/04

48

Section “20 A sensor”

j97

Table 6j

97

Section “Composition of the markers”

j168

Figure 76, “Signal diagram of highspeed counter”

j194

Section “Function of the GET function
block”

j202

Section “Function of the year timeswitch function block”

j219

Section “Accuracy”

j223

Section “Function of the pulse widthmodulation function block”

j230

Section “Time range”, tablej

231

Section “Variable setpoint values”,
examplej234

Figure 106

j

235,
236

Figure 107 and Figure 108j269

Section “Password incorrect or nolonger known”

j305

Section “Memory card”

j308

Section “EASY-SOFT (-PRO)”j

315

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC),
radio interference suppressionj316

Dielectric strength

Omitted11

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

About This Manual

EditionPage

Description

06/03

58

Cable length and cross-sections

59

Section “Calculating the cable lengthwith known cable resistance”

197

Section “Memory requirement of the 7day time switch”

j202

Section “Memory requirement for theyear time switch”

j

220

Coils

j

242

Coil

j

248

Note: length of spur line

332

List of the function blocksj337

HW, HY: space requirement at thefunction block outputj132

Data block comparatorj139

Data block transfer

j153

NOT Boolean sequence

180Entering setpoint valuesj183

PID controllerj189

Signal smoothing filterj195

Warning switching behaviourj

204

Value scalingj

212

Numerical convertersj

221

Pulse width modulationj

226

Set cycle timej257

Note on Status display

j266

Activating the password

274

Note on DST time change

05/03

12

New

Modification
j

j

j

j

j
j

Omitted08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

List of revisions

EditionPage

Description

New

11/02

302

QA analog output, Value rangej336

Function block output (operands)j15

Target readershipj

15

Proper use

j

21/21

Menu displays

24

Operating buttonsj26

Operating buttonsj46

Number of circuits

58

Surge impedance

61

Fig. 36, Station numberj78

Fig. 49, Station numberj89

Short-circuit/overload with expansion

108

Number of circuit connectionsj115

Notation for >I1 and QV>

j117

Notation for >I1 and QV>

j117

Notation for >I1 and QV>

j122

Useful coil functions

129

Notation for QV>

j151

Notation for QV>

j163

Notation for I1 and I4

j177

Memory requirement 160 Bytesj197

Memory requirement 68 Bytesj202

Memory requirement 68 Bytesj218

Fig. 98, last line

228

Notation for parameter display

j

232

Memory requirement 48 Bytesj240

Pulse and pause time

250

Point to point connection

Modification

Omitted

j

j
j

j

j

j

j
j
13

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

About This Manual

14

EditionPage

Description

New

Modification

11/02

253

125 KB factory default settingj290

Processing function blocks

j

294/
295

Off-delay I7 and I8j302

QA analog outputj

303

Saving and loading circuit diagramsj318

List of the function blocksj318

Memory requirementj

Omitted08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

1

Target readershipeasy800

easy must only be installed and wired up by trained
electricians or other persons familiar with the installation ofelectrical equipment.
A specialist knowledge of electrical engineering is needed
for commissioning and creating circuit diagrams. Whencontrolling active components such as motors or pressure
cylinders, parts of the system can be damaged and persons
put at risk if easy is connected or programmed incorrectly.

Proper use

easy is a programmable switching and control device and isused as a replacement for relay and contactor control
circuits. easy must be properly installed before use.
easy is designed to be installed in an enclosure, switch
cabinet or distribution board. Both the power feed and thesignal terminals must be laid and covered so as to prevent
accidental contact.
The installation must conform to regulations forelectromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
The power up of the easy must not cause any hazards arisingfrom activated devices, such as unexpected motor startups
or power ups.

Improper use
easy should not be used as a substitute for safety-related
controls such as burner or crane controls, emergency-stop or
two-hand safety controls.

15

easy800

Overview

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800 is an electronic control relay with:• Logic functions,• Timing relay and counter functions,• Time switch functions• Arithmetic functions• PID controllers• Operator and display functions
easy800 is a control and input device rolled into one. With
easy800 you can create solutions for domestic applications
as well as for tasks in machine and plant construction.
The integral easy-NET network enables the connection of up
to eight easy-NET stations to form a single control system.
Each easy-NET station can contain an individual circuit
diagram. This allows the design of systems using fast
controllers with decentralised intelligence.
Circuit diagrams are connected up using ladder diagrams,
and each element is entered directly via the easy display. For
example, you can:• connect make and break contacts in series and in parallel• switch output relays and auxiliary contacts,• define outputs as coils, impulse relays, rising or fallingedge-triggered relays or as latching relays,• select timing relays with different functions:– on-delayed,– on-delayed with random switching,– off-delayed,– off-delayed with random switching,– on and off delayed,– on and off delayed with random switching,– single pulse,– synchronous flashing,– asynchronous flashing.

16

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Overview• use up and down counters,• count high-speed signals:– up and down counters with upper and lower limit
values,– preset,– frequency counters,– high-speed counters,– count incremental encoder values.
• compare values,• display any texts with variables, enter setpoints• process analog input and output values (DC units),• process additional inputs and outputs,• use 7-day and year time switches,• count operating hours (operating hours counter),• communicate via the integrated easy-NET network,• provide closed-loop control with P, PI and PID controllers,• scale arithmetic values,• output manipulated variables as pulse-width modulated
signals,• run arithmetic functions:– add,– subtract,– multiply,– divide.
• track the flow of current in the circuit diagram• load, save and password-protect circuit diagrams
If you prefer to wire up easy800 from a PC, then use
EASY-SOFT or EASY-SOFT-PRO. EASY-SOFT or
EASY-SOFT-PRO allow you to create and test your circuit
diagram on the PC. EASY-SOFT (-PRO) enables you to printout your circuit diagram in DIN, ANSI or easy format.

17

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800

Device overview

easy basic units at a glance

a

b

c

d
h

e
f

g
Figure 1:

Device overview

a Power supply
b Inputs
c easy-NET connections
d Operating status LEDse Interface socket for memory card or PC connection
f Buttons
g Outputs
h Display18

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Device overview

easy800 type references
easy - x x x - x x - x x x
LCD display: X = No display
Time switch: C = Available; E = Expansion
Output type:
R = Relay
T = Transistor
Supply voltage, device and inputs
AC = AC voltage
DC = DC voltage
Number of inputs/outputs (+ expansion)
19 = 12 I/6 O + expansion
20 = 12 I/7 O + expansion
21 = 12 I/8 O + expansion
22 = 12 I/9 O + expansion
Performance class 8 (= 8 easy-NET network stations)easy control relay

19

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800

easy operation

Buttons
ALT

L

DE

DEL: Delete object in circuit diagram
ALT: Special functions in circuit-diagram, Status display
Cursor buttons ú í Í Ú:
Move cursor
Select menu items
Set contact numbers, contacts and values

ES

OK

C

OK: Next menu level, Save your entry
ESC: Previous menu level, Cancel

Moving through menus and choosing values
DEL

and

ALT

OK

ESC

Show System menu
Go to next menu level
Select menu item
Activate, modify, save your entry
Return to last menu level
Cancel your entry since the last OKÍ Ú Change menu item
ú í

Change value
Change place

Function of P buttons:úí

20

Input P1,
Input P3,

ÍÚ

Input P2
Input P4

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy operation

Selecting main and system menu
Status display
I .2..5.......
R.2
MO 02:00
RS
Q..34 .
MO
S .2 6..

OK

Current selection
flashes inthe easy menu

DEL

P-

and

ALT

STOP

ESC

ESC

No
password

PROGRAM...
STOPå RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKSECURITY...
SYSTEM...
MENU LANGUAGECONFIGURATOR...

1st menu level
Main menu

1st menu level
System menu

Date display
I .2..5.......
MO 11:50
Q..34....

ALTP-

I .2..5.......

STOP

PMO 01.04.2002
Q..34....
STOP

easy800 status display
InputsI 12..........
P-

Weekday/Time
Outputs

MO 02:00
Q..34....

STOP

or Weekday/Date
RUN/STOP/BUSY mode

On: 1, 2, 3, 4/Off:…

21

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800

Status display for local expansion
InputsExpansion
Weekday/Time
Outputs

R 1.........12
RS

AC

P-

MO 10:42
S 1......8

AC expansion ok/P buttons
or Weekday/Date

STOP

On: 1, 2, 3, 4/Off:…
RS = Expansion functioning correctly

easy800 advanced Status display
Retention/debounce/easy-NET station

RE

:
:
NT1 :
AC :
DC :
GW :

I 12...6.89..12RE
I NT1 AC PMO 14:42
Q 12345678

T
RUN

AC expansion ok/P buttons
Startup behaviour

Retention switched on
Debounce switched oneasy-NET station with station address
AC expansion functioning correctly
DC expansion functioning correctly
Bus coupling module detected
GW flashes: Only easy200-easy detected. I/O expansion not be detected.
ST : When the power supply is switched on, easy switches to STOP modeI22

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy operation

easy800 LED display
easy800 has two LEDs located on the front which indicate
the state of the power supply voltage (POW) as well as the
RUN or STOP modes (a Fig. 1, Page 18).
Table 1:

LED power supply/RUN-STOP mode

LED OFF

No power supply

LED continuously lit

Power supply present, STOP mode

LED flashing

Power supply present, RUN mode

Table 2:easy-NET LED (easy-NET)

LED OFFeasy-NET not operational, fault, in
configuration

LED continuously lit

easy-NET is initialised and no station has
been detected.

LED flashingeasy-NET operating fault-free23

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800

Menu structure
Main menu without password protection
X You access the main menu by pressing OK.
STOP: Circuit diagram display
RUN: Power flow display

Main menu
PROGRAM...
STOP å RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKPROGRAM...
DELETE PROGRAM
CARD

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
FUNCTION RELAYSParameter
display

Circuit diagram

SAVE

Æ

æ
Æ
æ
SEARCHÆæGO TO Ææ

CANCEL

Parameters

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
FUNCTION RELAYSFunction block editor
Parameters

SAVE

Æ

æ
æ
æ
SEARCHÆæGO TO Ææ

CANCELPROGRAM...
DELETE PROGRAM
CARD...

24

DELETE ?

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy operation

Main menu
PROGRAM...
DELETE PROGRAM
CARD...

PROGRAM...
STOP
RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKPROGRAM...
STOP
RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKPROGRAM...
STOP
RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKDEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD ?

REPLACE ?

DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD ?

åParameter display

REPLACE ?

DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD ?

DELETE ?

åParameters

Display for date and time
settingå
SET CLOCKDST SETTING

HH:MM
DD.MM
YEAR

--:---.-____SET CLOCKDST SETTINGNONE åMANUAL å
EU å
GB å
US å

HH:MM
DD.MM
YEAR

14:23
03.10
2001

SUMMERTIME START
DD.MM : --.-SUMMER TIME END
DD.MM : --.--

Only one selection is possible.

25

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800

Main menu with password protection
Main menu

Unlockingeasy

PASSWORD...
STOP
RUN å
PARAMETERSSET CLOCK

Password entry

Four wrong entries(if enabled)
DELETE ALL?

Password

Status display

PASSWORD...
RUN

Correct
entry

easy800 System menu
X The System menu is accessed by simultaneously pressing
DEL and ALT.

System menu

Password
setup

SECURITY...
SYSTEM...
MENU LANGUAGECONFIGURATOR...

Passwordchange/delete26

Password entry

PASSWORD...
RANGE...

ENTER PASSWORD------

ACTIVATE PWCHANGE PW

ACTIVATE PWCHANGE PW

ENTER PASSWORD------

ACTIVATE PWCHANGE PW

PASSWORD...
RANGE...

PROGRAM åÆ
PARAMETERSTIME
OPERATING MODE æINTERFACE
DELETE FUNCTION

PROGRAM åÆ
PARAMETERS åTIME å
OPERATING MODEåæ
INTERFACE å
DELETE FUNCTION

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy operation

System menu
SECURITY...
SYSTEM...
MENU LANGUAGECONFIGURATOR...

DEBOUNCE å Æ
P BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEæDISPLAY...
RETENTION...
INFORMATION...

DEBOUNCE å
P BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEDISPLAY...
RETENTION...
INFORMATION...

Retention only in STOP
mode

DEBOUNCE å
P BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEDISPLAY...
RETENTION...
INFORMATION...

DEBOUNCE å
P BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEDISPLAY...
RETENTION...
INFORMATION...

DEBOUNCE å Æ
P BUTTONS å
RUN MODE å
CARD MODE å æ
DISPLAY...
RETENTION...
INFORMATION...

Æ
æ

Æ

æ

CONTRAST:
LIGHTING

MB -- -> MBC -- -> C
CH -- -> CH
B:
CI -- -> CI
DB -- -> DB
T -- -> T

0
å

-- Æ
--200 æ----Æ

æ

DC TCA LCD NET
OS : 1.10.201
CRC: 25808

2708/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800

System menu
SECURITY...
SYSTEM...
MENU LANGUAGECONFIGURATOR...

ENGLISHDEUTSCH å
FRANCAISESPANOLITALIANOPORTUGUESNEDERLANDSSVENSKA
POLSKITURKCESECURITY...
SYSTEM...
MENU LANGUAGECONFIGURATOR...

NET...

Ææ

Only one selection is possible.

NET PARAMETERS..
STATIONS...
CONFIGURE...

easy-NET only in
STOP mode

NET PARAMETERS..
STATIONS...
CONFIGURE...

NET-ID : __Æ
BAUDRATE: ____KB
BUSDELAY: __SEND IO:æREMOTE RUNREMOTE IO

NET-ID : 01
Æ
BAUDRATE: 1000KB
BUSDELAY: 08
SEND IO:åæ
REMOTE RUN åREMOTE IOå28

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy operation

System menu
NET PARAMETERS..
STATIONS...
CONFIGURATOR...

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

This list is only createdin Station 1.
This list only appears if
station 1 has been
selected.

Æ

æ

SAVE
CANCELNET PARAMETERS..
STATIONS...
CONFIGURATOR...

CONFIGURE?

Æ
æ
Æ
æ

CONFIGURATIONINPROGRESS.

Fault scenario
with ID conflict.

ERR: ID-CONFLICTCONFIGURATIONOVERWRITE?

Fault scenario
with network
fault.

ERR: TIME OUT

Selecting or toggling between menu items
Cursor Í Ú

PROGRAM...
STOPPARAMETERSSET CLOCK

OK

Select or toggle

29

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800

Cursor display
HH:MM
DD.MM
YEAR

'4:23
05.05
2003

The cursor flashes:
Full cursor Ê/:• Move cursor with ú í,
• in circuit diagram also with Í Ú

HH:MM
DD.MM
YEAR

14:23
05.05
2003

Value M/ M
• Change position with ú í• Change values with Í ÚFlashing values/menus are shown in grey in this manual.

Setting values
HH:MM
DD.MM
YEAR

ValuesPositions
Value at position

30

Change value Í Ú
Select cursor position in value ú íChange value at position Í Ú

14:23
03.10
2002

OK

ESC

Store entries
Retain previous value

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

2

Installation

The easy must only be installed and wired up by qualified
electricians or other persons familiar with the installation ofelectrical equipment.
Danger of electric shock!
Never carry out electrical work on the device while thepower supply is switched on.
Always follow the safety rules:• Switch off and isolate,• Ensure that the device is no longer live,• Secure against reclosing,• Short-circuit and ground,• Cover adjacent live parts.
The easy is installed in the following order:• Mounting,• Wiring up the inputs,• Wiring up the outputs,• Wiring up the NET network (if required),• Connecting the power supply.

Mounting

Install easy in an enclosure, switch cabinet or distribution
board so that the power feed and terminal connections
cannot be touched accidentally during operation.
Snap easy onto a IEC/EN 60715 top-hat rail or fix easy inplace using fixing brackets. easy can be mounted verticallyor horizontally.

hWhen using the easy with expansion units, connect the
expansion concerned before mounting (see a page 34).

31

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation30

For ease of wiring, leave a gap of at least 3 cm between theeasy terminals and the wall or adjacent devices.

30

30

30

Figure 2:.

Clearances to the easy

Mounting on mounting rail
X Hook the easy to the top edge of the top-hat rail and hinge
into place while pressing down slightly. Press down lightly
on both the device and the top-hat rail until easy snaps
over the lower edge of the top-hat rail.

1

The easy will clip into place automatically.
X Check that easy is seated firmly.

easy is mounted vertically on a top-hat rail in the same way.

2

32

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Mounting

Screw mounting
For screw mounting on a mounting plate, fixing brackets
must be used that can be fixed to the back of the easy. The
fixing brackets can be ordered as an accessory.

CK

CLI

!

Figure 3:

Inserting a fixing bracket-hThree fixing brackets are sufficient for a device with four
fixing points.
EASY2..-..:

Figure 4:

easy600, easy800:

Screw mounting for easy33

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Connecting the expansion
device12

43Figure 5:34

Expansion connection

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Terminals

Terminals

Tools
Slot-head screwdriver, width 3.5 mm, tightening torque
0.6 Nm.

Cable cross-sections• Solid: 0.2 to 4 mm2 (AWG 22 - -12)
• Flexible with ferrule: 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 22 -12)

Network cables and plug

Use the prefabricated EASY-NT-“Length” cables whenpossible.
Other cable lengths can be manufactured using the
EASY-NT-CAB cable, the EASY-NT-RJ45 plug as well as the
EASY-RJ45-TOOL crimping tool.
AWG 24, 0.2 mm2 are the largest crimpable cross-sections.
The first and last stations in the network must each beterminated with the EASY-NT-R bus termination resistor.

Connecting the power
supplyh

For the connection data of both versions, easy-DC with
24 V DC and easy-AC with standard voltages of 100 V to240 V AC, refer to Chapter “Technical data” fromPage 318.
The easy800 devices run a system test for one second after
the power supply has been switched on. Either RUN or
STOP mode will be activated after this time depending on
the default setting.

35

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

AC basic units
L
N
F1

L N N
115/230 V ~Figure 6:36Power supply on the AC-basic units

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the power supply

EASY…-AC-.E expansion units
L
N
F1

E+ E-

Figure 7:

R1...

R12 L N N
115/230 V ~Power supply on the AC expansion units

Attention!
A short current surge will be produced when switching on
for the first time. Do not switch on easy AC via Reed
contacts since these may burn or melt.

37

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

DC basic units
L01 +
L01 –

F1

...
...V

0V

0V

I1

I2

I4

I3

I5

I6

I7

DC : +24 V

Figure 8:

Power supply on the DC basic units

EASY…-DC-.E DC expansion units
L01+
L01F1

E+ E-

Figure 9:

h

38

R1

...

R12 24V 0V 0V
24 VPower supply on the DC expansion units

easy DC is protected against polarity reversal. To ensurethat easy works correctly, ensure that the polarity of eachterminal is correct.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the inputs

Cable protection
Both easy AC and DC versions require cable protection (F1)rated for at least 1 A (slow).

hConnecting the inputs

When easy is switched on for the first time, its power
supply circuit behaves like a capacitor. Use an appropriate
device for switching on the power supply and do not use
any reed relay contacts or proximity switches.

easy inputs switch electronically. Once you have connecteda contact via an input terminal, you can reuse it as a contact
in your easy circuit diagram as often as you like.
L
+24 V
S1

N
0V

I1
I1

Figure 10:

i1

Connecting the inputs

Connect contacts such as push-button actuators or switches
to easy input terminals.

Connecting the AC inputs
Caution!
For easy-AC, connect the inputs to the same line as thepower feed in accordance with the VDE, IEC, UL and CSA
safety regulations. Otherwise easy will not detect theswitching level and may be damaged or destroyed by
overvoltage.

39

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

L
N

F1

...
L

N

N

l1

I2

l3

I4

l5

I6

I7

115/230 V hFigure 11:

easy-AC basic unit

L1
N
F1

E+ E–

R1 R2 R3 R4R5R6

R7 R8 R9R10 R11 R12

L

N

N

115/230 V hFigure 12:

Inputs on the EASY…-AC-.E expansion device

Connect the inputs, for example, to push-button actuators,
switches or relay/contactor contacts.
Input signal voltage range• OFF signal: 0 V to 40 V
• ON signal: 79 V to 264 V

40

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the inputs

Input current• R1 to R12, I1 to I6, I9 to I12:
0.5 mA/0.25 mA at 230 V/115 V• I7, I8: 6 mA/4 mA at 230 V/115 V
Cable length
Severe interference can cause the input of a signal condition“1” without a proper signal being applied. Observe
therefore the following maximum cable lengths:• R1 to R12: 40 m without additional circuit• I1 to I6, I9 to I12: 100 m with input debounce switched on,
60 m without additional circuit with input debounce
switched off.
• I7, I8: 100 m without additional circuit
The following applies to expansion units:
With longer cables, connect a diode (e.g. 1N4007) for 1 A,
minimum 1 000 V reverse voltage, in series to the easy input.
Ensure that the diode is pointing towards the input as shownin the circuit diagram, otherwise easy will not detect the 1state.
L1
N
F1

E+ E–

R1 R2 R3 R4R5R6

R7 R8 R9R10 R11 R12

L

N

N

115/230 V hFigure 13:

easy-AC with a diode on the inputs

41

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Neon bulbs with a maximum residual current of 2 mA/1 mA
at 230 V/115 V can be connected to I7 and I8.

hAlways use neon bulbs that are operated with a separate
N connection.
Caution!
Do not use reed relay contacts on I7, I8. These may burnor melt due to the high inrush current of I7, I8.
Two-wire proximity switches have a residual current with the“0” state. If this residual current is too high, the easy input
may detect a “1” signal.
Therefore, use inputs I7 and I8. An additional input circuit isrequired if more inputs are used.
Increasing the input current
The following input circuit can be used in order to prevent
interference and also when using two-wire proximity
switches:
L
N
F1

100 nF/275 V h

L

N

I1

115/230 V hFigure 14:

42

Increasing the input current

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the inputshWhen using a 100 nF capacitor the drop-off time of the
input increases by 80 (66.6) ms at 50 (60) Hz.
A resistor can be connected in series with the circuit shownin order to restrict the inrush current.
LN
F1

100 nF/275 V h

1 kO

L

N

I1

115/230 V hFigure 15:

Limitation of the inrush current with a resistor

Complete devices for increasing the input current areavailable under the type reference EASY256-HCI.
L
N

F1

1 kO

...
L

N

N

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

115/230 V hFigure 16:heasy800 with easy256-HCI

The increased capacitance increases the drop-out time byapprox. 40 ms.
43

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Connecting the easy-DC
Use input terminals I1 to I12 to connect push-button
actuators, switches or 3 or 4-wire proximity switches. Given
the high residual current, do not use 2-wire proximity
switches.
Input signal voltage range• I1 to I6, I9, I10– OFF signal: 0 to 5
– ON signal: 15 V to 28.8 V• I7, I8, I11, I12– OFF signal: < 8 V– ON signal: > 8 V
Input current• I1 to I6, I9, I10, R1 to R12: 3.3 mA at 24 V
• I7, I8, I11, I12: 2.2 mA at 24 V
L01⫹
L01⫺

F1

...
...V

Figure 17:

44

0V

0V

easy-DC

l1

I2

l3

I4

l5

I6

I7

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the inputs

L01 +
L01 –
F1

E+ E–

R1 R2 R3 R4R5R6

R7 R8 R9R10 R11 R12 +24V 0V

0V

24 V H

Figure 18:

EASY…-DC-.E

Connecting analog inputs
Inputs I7, I8, I11 and I12 can also be used to connect analog
voltages ranging from 0 V to 10 V.
The following applies:• I7 = IA01
• I8 = IA02
• I11 = IA03
• I12 = IA04
The resolution is 10-bit = 0 to 1023.
Caution!
Analog signals are more sensitive to interference thandigital signals. Consequently, more care must be taken
when laying and connecting the signal lines. Incorrect
switching states may occur if they are not connected
correctly.
X Use shielded twisted pair cables to prevent interferencewith the analog signals.
X For short cable lengths, ground the shield at both ends
using a large contact area. If the cable length exceeds
30 m or so, grounding at both ends can result inequalisation currents between the two grounding points
45

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installationand thus in the interference of analog signals. In this case,only ground the cable at one end.
X Do not lay signal lines parallel to power cables.
X Connect inductive loads to be switched via the easy
outputs to a separate power feed, or use a suppressor
circuit for motors and valves. If loads such as motors,
solenoid valves or contactors are operated with easy via
the same power feed, switching may give rise tointerference on the analog input signals.
The following circuits contain examples of applications foranalog value processing.

hEnsure that the reference potential is connected. Connect
the 0 V of the power supply unit for the different setpoint
potentiometers and sensors shown in the examples to the
0 V terminal of the easy power feed.
Setpoint potentiometer
L01⫹
L01⫺

h

F1

H
0V

...
24 V

Figure 19:

0V

0V

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

Setpoint potentiometer

Use a potentiometer with a resistance of F 1 kO, e.g.
1 kO, 0.25 W.

46

+12 V

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the inputs

L01⫹
L01⫺
1.3 kO/0.25 W
F1

1 kO/0.25 W...
24 V 0 V

Figure 20:

0V

I1

I2

I3

I6

I5

I4

I7

Setpoint potentiometer with upstream resistor

L01⫹
L01⫺

h

12 V

H

0...10 V

F1

0V

0V

+12 V

...
24 V 0 V

Figure 21:

0V

I1

I3

I2

I5

I4

I6

I7

Brightness sensor

Temperature sensor
L01⫹
L01⫺

+24 V H
F1–35...55 ˚C

24 V 0 V

0V

I1

Figure 22:

I2

I3

I4

I5

+24 V H

0V

0V

Out
0...10 V

Out
0...10 V

I6–35...55 ˚C

I7

I8

I9

I10

I11

I12

0V

–

Temperature sensor
47

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

20 A sensor
4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA) sensors can be connected easily
without any problem using an external 500 O resistor.
L01⫹
L01⫺

a
F1

4...20 mA

500 O

...
24 V

Figure 23:

0V

0V

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

20 A sensor

a Analog sensor

The following values apply:• 4 mA = 1.9 V• 10 mA = 4.8 V• 20 mA = 9.5 V(according to U = R x I = 478 O x 10 mA ~ 4.8 V)

48

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the inputs

Connecting high-speed counters and frequency
generators
High-speed counter signals on the easy800 can be counted
correctly on inputs I1 to I4 independently of the cycle time.
L01 +
L01 –
L02 +
F1

...V

0V

0V

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

24 V H

Figure 24:

High-speed counter, frequency generator49

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Connecting incremental encoders
Inputs I1, I2 and I3, I4 on the easy800 can each be used forthe high-speed counting of an incremental encoder
independently of the cycle time. The incremental encoder
must generate two 24 V DC square wave signals with a 90°
phase shift between them.
L01 +
L01 –
L02 +
F1

A

...V

0V

0V

I1

I2

B

I3

I4

I5

I6

24 V H

Figure 25:

Connecting the outputs

Connecting incremental encoders

The Q... outputs function inside easy as isolated contacts.

Q1

50

1

2

Figure 26:

Output “Q”

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting relay outputs

The respective relay coils are actuated in the easy circuit
diagram via the output relays Q 01 to Q 06 or Q 08 to Q .
You can use the signal states of the output relays as make or
break contacts in the easy circuit diagram for additionalswitching conditions.
The relay or transistor outputs are used to switch loads suchas fluorescent tubes, filament bulbs, contactors, relays or
motors. Check the technical thresholds and output data
before installing such devices (see a chapter “Technicaldata”, from Page 313).

Connecting relay outputs
1 2
Q1

EASY8....-RC..

1 2
Q2

1 2
Q3

1 2

1 2
Q4

Q5

1 2
Q6

10 000 000

R
24 V H 8 A
115 V h 8 A
230 V h 8 A

2A
2A
2A

1000 W
0 V H, N

10 x 58 W

25 000F 8 A/B 16
L1, L2, L3 (115/230 V h)
+ 24 V H

Figure 27:

EASY8..-..RC.. relay outputs

51

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

EASY6..-..RE..
1 2
S1

1 2
S2

1 2
S3

1 2

1 2
S4

S5

1 2

R

S6

24 V H 8 A
115 V h 8 A
230 V h 8 A

10 000 000

2A
2A
2A

1000 W
0 V H, N

10 x 58 W

25 000F 8 A/B 16
L1, L2, L3 (115/230 V h)
+ 24 V H

Figure 28:

EASY6..-..-RE.. relay outputs

EASY2..-RE
1
S1

2

1 2

R
S2

10 000 000

24 V H 8 A
115 V h 8 A
230 V h 8 A

2A
2A
2A

1000 W
0 V H, N

10 x 58 W

25 000F 8 A/B 16
L1, L2, L3 (115/230 Vh)+ 24 V H

Figure 29:

EASY2..-..-RE.. relay outputs

Unlike the inputs, the MFD-R.., EASY6..-..RE relay outputs
can be connected to different lines.
Do not exceed the maximum voltage of 250 V AC on arelay contact. If the voltage exceeds this threshold,flashover may occur at the contact, resulting in damage tothe device or a connected load.

52

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting transistor outputs

Connecting transistor
outputs

EASY8..-DC-TC, EASY6..-DC-TE

24 VQ

0 VQ

Q1
S1

Q2
S2

Q3
S3

Q4
S4

Q5
S5

Q6
S6

Q7
S7

24 VQ

Q8
S8

0 VQ

F 10 AF 10 A

0VH

f 2.5 Af 2.5 AEASY8..-.DC-…

EASY6..-DC-..

RR

24 V H

0.5 A

0.5 A

Q1 – Q4
Q5 – Q8

3W
5W

24 V

+ 24 V H(20.4 – 28.8 V H)

24 V H

0.5 A

0.5 A
5 W/24 V

R+ 24 V H(20.4 – 28.8 V H)

24 V H

0.5 A

0.5 A
5 W/24 V

F 10 A
24 VQ

0 VQ

Q1

Q2

Figure 30:

Q3

Q4

Transistor outputs EASY8..-DC-TC, EASY6..-DC-TE

Parallel connection:
Up to four outputs can be connected in parallel in order toincrease the power. The output current will increase in thiscase to a maximum of 2 A.

53

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Caution!
Outputs may only be connected in parallel within a group(Q1 to Q4 or Q5 to Q8, S1 to S4 or S5 to S8), such as Q1
and Q3 or Q5, Q7 and Q8. Outputs connected in parallel
must be switched at the same time.
Caution!
Please note the following when switching off inductive
loads:
Suppressed inductive loads cause less interference in theentire electrical system. For optimum suppression the
suppressor circuits are best connected directly in theproximity of the inductive load.
If inductive loads are not suppressed, the following applies:
Several inductive loads should not be switched off
simultaneously to avoid overheating the driver blocks in theworst possible case. If in the event of an emergency stop the+24 V DC power supply is to be switched off by means of acontact, and if this would mean switching off more than one
controlled output with an inductive load, then you must
provide suppressor circuits for these loads (a following
diagrams).
+ 24 V H
Uemax < UZ < 33 V
Q., S.

Q., S.

0VH

Figure 31:

Inductivity with suppressor circuit

Behaviour with short-circuit/overload
Should a short circuit or overload occur on a transistor
output, this output will switch off. The output will switch on
up to maximum temperature after the cooling time has
elapsed. This time depends on the ambient temperature and54

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting analog outputs

the current involved. If the fault condition persists, theoutput will keep switching off and on until the fault iscorrected or until the power supply is switched off(a Section “Monitoring of short-circuit/overload with
EASY..-D.-T..”, Page 297).

Connecting analog
outputs

EASY820-DC-RC and EASY822-DC-TC each have an analog
output QA 01, 0 V to 10 V DC, 10 bit resolution (0 to 1023).
The analog output allows you to control servo valves andother final controlling elements.
Caution!
Analog signals are more sensitive to interference thandigital signals. Consequently, more care must be taken
when laying and connecting the signal lines. Incorrect
switching states may occur if they are not connected
correctly.

Connecting servo valves
L01 +
L01 –

F1

...V

0V

0V

I1

I2

I11

I12

0V

QA1

24 V H

Figure 32:

Connecting servo valves55

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Setpoint entry for a drive
L01 +
L01 –

F1

24 V 0 V

0V

I1

I2

I11

I12

0V

IA

0V

QA1

24 V H

Figure 33: Setpoint definition for a drive

Connecting the NET
network

easy800 enables the installation and configuration of the
NET network. Up to eight devices can be connected to thisnetwork. Further information can be found in the Chapter“easy-NET network”, Page 247.

Accessories
Connection plug:
8-pole RJ45, EASY-NT-RJ45
Connection assignment of the RJ45 socket on thedevice
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Figure 34:
56

RJ45 socket

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the NET network

Connection cable:
4-pair twisted cable; a chapter “Technical data”,
Page 330
A
A
B
B

Figure 35:

1 ECAN_H
2 ECAN_L
3 GND (Ground)
4 SEL_IN

Connection assignment

ECAN_H data cable, pin 1, cable pair A
ECAN_L data cable, pin 2, cable pair A
Ground cable GND, pin 3, cable pair B
Select cable SEL_IN, pin 4, cable pair BhMinimum operation with easy-NET functions with thecables ECAN_H, ECAN_L and GND. The SEL_IN cable isonly used for automatic addressing.
Table 3:

Prefabricated cables, RJ45 plug on both ends

Cable length

Type designationcm
30

EASY-NT-30

80

EASY-NT-80

150

EASY-NT-150

Material for self-manufactured cables
100 m 4 x 0.18 mm2: EASY-NT-CAB
Required crimping tool for RJ45 plug: EASY-RJ45-TOOL
Bus termination resistor
The first and last stations in the network must be provided
with a bus termination resistor.
• Value: 124 O• Termination connector: EASY-NT-R

57

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Cable length and cross-sections
For correct operation of the network the cable lengths, crosssections and cable resistances must correspond to thefollowing table.
Cable length

Cable resistance

Cross-section

m

mO/m

mm2

AWG

up to 40

F 140

0,13

26

up to 175

F 70

0.25 to 0.34

23, 22up to 250

F 60

0.34 to 0.5

22, 21, 20

up to 400

F 40

0.5 to 0.6

20, 19up to 600

F 26

0.75 to 0.8

18

up to 1000

F 16

1,5

16

The surge impedance of the cables used must be 120 O.

58

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the NET network

Calculating the cable length with known cable
resistanceIf the resistance of the cable per unit of length is known(resistance per unit length R’ in O/m), the entire cable
resistance RL must not exceed the following values. RL
depends on the selected baud rates:
Baud rate

Cable resistance RL

kBaud

O

10 to 125

F 30

250

F 25

500
1000

F 12

lmax = maximum cable length in m
RL = Total cable resistance in O
R’ = Cable resistance per unit length in O/mlmax =RL
R’

Calculating cross-section with known cable lengths
The minimum cross-section is determined for the known
maximum extent of the network.
l= cable length in m
Smin = minimum cable cross-section in mm2
rcu = resistivity of copper, if not otherwise stated 0.018 Omm2/m

Smin =hl x rcu
12,4

If the result of the calculation does not yield a standard
cross-section, the next larger cross-section is used.

59

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Calculating length with known cable cross-section
The maximum cable lengths are calculated for a known
conductor cross-section
lmax = cable length in m
S= minimum cable cross-section in mm2
rcu = resistivity of copper, if not otherwise stated 0.018 Omm2/m

lmax =

S x 12.4
rcu

Plugging and unplugging network cables
easy800 is provided with two RJ45 network sockets.
The socket 1 in the first station is for the bus terminating
resistor. For other stations, socket 1 is used for plugging in
the incoming cable. Socket 2 is used for the outgoing cableor for the bus termination resistor on the last physical stationin the network.

60

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Connecting the NET networkb
11

I 1 - 121

2

R 1 - 12

a
Q1-8

S1-8

2

2
1

2

I 1 - 12R 1 - 12

Q1-6

S1-6

3

3
1

2

1

2

AS-Interface+ –I 1 - 12

Q1-6

8

8

I 1 - 12

b

c
Q1-8

Figure 36:

Bus termination resistorsa First easy800 in the NET
b Bus termination resistorc Last easy800 in the NET
Physical location, place
Station number

61

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Both RJ45 interfaces are visible after the cover plate has
been removed.
When a cable is plugged in, the mechanical connection must
be audible (click) and visible 1 .
Before a plug or cable is removed, the mechanical locking
feature must be undone 2 , 3 .

2

1

3

Figure 37:

Expanding inputs/outputs

Plugging and unplugging cables

You can add expansion units to all easy800 in order toincrease the number of inputs and outputs:

Expandable easy
basic units

Expansion units

EASY8..-..-R..
EASY8..-..-T..

EASY618-..-RE• 12 AC inputs,• 6 relay outputs

EASY620-..-TE• 12 DC inputs,• 8 transistor outputs

EASY202-RE

2 relay outputs, common1)

Special expansion units for connecting to other bus
systems are shown in the latest product catalogue.
1) Common supply for multiple outputs

62

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Expanding inputs/outputs

Local expansion
Local expansion units are connected directly next to thebasic unit.
X Connect the easy expansion unit via the easy-LINK-DS

plug connector.
EASY-LINK-DS

EASY8..-..-R..
EASY82.-DC-T..

Figure 38:

EASY6..-..RE..
EASY6..-..-TE..
EASY2…

Connecting local expansions with easy800

The following electrical separation is implemented
between the EASY8..-..-.C. basic unit and the expansion
device (separation always in local connection of expansion
unit)• Simple isolation 400 V AC (+10 %)• Safe isolation 240 V AC (+10 %)Units may be destroyed if the value 400 V AC +10 % isexceeded, and may cause the malfunction of the entire
system or machine!

hBasic unit and expansion unit can be provided withdifferent DC power supplies.

6308/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Installation

Remote expansion
Remote expansion units can be installed and run up to 30 m
away from the basic unit.
Warning!
The two-wire or multiple-wire cable between the devices
must adhere to the insulation voltage requirement whichis stipulated for the installation environment. Otherwise, afault (ground fault, short-circuit) may lead to thedestruction of the units or injury to persons.
A cable such as NYM-0 with a rated operational voltage of
Ue = 300/500 V AC is normally sufficient.

E+ E–

EASY200EASYEASY8…

EASY6..RE/TE

E+ E–

Ue = 300/500 V
EASY…-AC-…E
Figure 39:h64Connecting remote expansions to the easy800

Terminals E+ and E– of the EASY200-EASY are protectedagainst short-circuits and polarity reversal.
Functionality is only ensured if E+ is connected with E+
and E- with E-.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

3

Switching on

Commissioning

Before startup check whether the power supply, inputs,
outputs and the easy-NET connection are properly
connected:• 24 V DC version:– Terminal +24 V: +24 V voltage:– Terminal 0 V: 0 V voltage:– Terminals I1 to I12, R1 to R12:
Actuation via +24 V• 230 V AC version:– Terminal L: Phase conductor– Terminal N: Neutral conductor N– Terminals I1 to I12, R1 to R12: Actuation via phaseconductor L
If you have already integrated devices into a system, secure
any parts of the system connected to the working area toprevent access and ensure that no-one can be injured if, forexample, motors start up unexpectedly.

Setting the menu
language
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANCAISESPANOL

When you switch on easy for the first time, you will be asked
to select the menu language.
å

X Use the cursor buttons Í or Ú to select the language

required.
– English– Deutsch– French– Spanish– Italian– Portuguese– Dutch– Swedish– Polish– Turkish65

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

X Press OK to confirm your choice and press ESC to exit themenu.
easy will then switch to the Status display.

hYou can change the language setting at a later date, if you
wish, see a Section “Changing the menu language”,
Page 270.
If you do not set the language, easy will display this menu
every time you switch on and wait for you to select a
language.

easy operating modes

easyeasy has two operating modes - RUN and STOP.
In RUN mode easy continuously processes a stored circuit
diagram until you select STOP or disconnect the power. The
circuit diagram, parameters and the easy settings are
retained in the event of a power failure. All you will have to
do is reset the real-time clock after the back-up time has
elapsed.Circuit diagram entry is only possible in STOP mode.
Caution!
In RUN mode, easy will immediately run the program
saved in the unit when the power supply is switched on.
This will not happen if STOP mode was set as startup
mode. In RUN mode outputs are activated according to
the switch logic involved.
The following applies to devices without display/operatingunit:• Memory card containing a valid circuit diagram is fitted.
• Device is switched on.
If the device does not contain a circuit diagram, the circuit
diagram on the memory card is loaded automatically andthe device processes the circuit diagram immediately in RUN
mode.

66

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Creating your first circuit
diagramCreating your first circuit
diagram

The following single line diagram takes you step by step
through wiring up your first circuit diagram. In this way you
will learn all the rules, quickly enabling you to use easy foryour own projects.
As with conventional wiring, you use contacts and relays in
the easy diagram. With easy, however, you no longer haveto connect up components individually. At the push of a few
buttons, the easy circuit diagram produces all the wiring
required. All you have to do is then connect any switches,
sensors, lamps or contactors you wish to use.
L01+
F1

S1

K1

S2

K1

H1
L01-

Figure 40:

Lamp controller with relays67

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

In the following example, easy carries out all the wiring andperforms the tasks of the circuit diagram shown below.
L01 +
L01 –

F1

S1

+24V 0V

S2

I1

I 01----I 02-

I2--Ä Q 01

Q1
1

2

H1
L01 –

Figure 41:

68

Lamp controller with easy

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Creating your first circuit
diagramStarting point Status display
I ............
I

MO 02:00

Q........

P-

STOP

h

When you switch on easy, it opens the Status display
immediately to show the switching state of the inputs andoutputs. It also indicates whether easy is already running acircuit diagram.

The examples were written without the use of expansion
units. If an expansion unit is connected, the Status display
will first show the status of the basic unit and then thestatus of the expansion unit before showing the first
selection menu.
X Press OK to switch to the main menu.

PROGRAM...

STOP å RUN

Press OK to switch to the next menu level, and press ESC tomove one level back.

PARAMETERSSET CLOCKh

OK has two other functions:• Press OK to save modified settings.
• In the circuit diagram, you can also press OK to insert
and modify contacts and relay coils.
In this case easy must be in STOP mode.

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
FUNCTION RELAYSX Press OK 2 x to enter the circuit diagram display via

menu items PROGRAM… h PROGRAM. This is where
you will create the circuit diagram.

69

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

Circuit diagram display
The circuit diagram display is currently empty. The cursor
flashes at the top left, which is where you will start to create
your diagram.

Ê

L: 1 C:1 B:7944

The location of the cursor is indicated in the status line. L: =Circuit connection (line), C: = Contact or coil (contact), B: =Free memory available in bytes. Start value 7944, with thefirst three circuit connections already generated.
The easy800 circuit diagram supports 4 contacts and one coilin series. The easy800 display can display 6 circuit diagram
contact fields.

MÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ-ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ-ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ-

m

l

L

ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ-ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊL: 1 C:1 B:7944

Use the Í Ú ú í cursor buttons to move the cursor overthe invisible circuit diagram grid.
The first four columns are contact fields, the fifth column isa coil field. Each line is a rung. easy automatically connects
the contact to the power supply.
I 01----I 02--...-Ä Q 01

L: 1 C:1 B:7944

Figure 42:

Circuit diagram with inputs I1, I2 and output Q1

X Now try to wire up the following easy diagram.

Switches S1 and S2 are at the input. I 01 and I 02 are thecontacts for the input terminals. Relay K1 is represented by
the relay coil Ä Q 01. The symbol identifies the coil'sfunction, in this case a relay coil acting as a contactor. Q 01
is one of the easy output relays.

70

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Creating your first circuit
diagram

From the first contact to the output coilWith easy, you work from the input to the output. The first
input contact is I 01.
X Press OK.
easy proposes the first contact I 01 at the cursor position.

I 01

L: 1 C:1 B:7944
I 01

X Press OK 2 x, to move the cursor across the 01 to theÊ

L: 1 C:1 B:7944
I 01

I flashes and can be changed, for example, to a P for a
pushbutton input using the cursor buttons Í or Ú.
However, nothing needs to be changed at this point.

I 02

L: 1 C:2 B:7944

second contact field.
You could also move the cursor to the next contact fieldusing the cursor button.
X Press OK.
Again, easy inserts a contact I 01 at the cursor position.
Change the contact number to I 02, so that break contact
S2 can be connected to input terminal I2.
X Press OK so that the cursor jumps to the next position andpress cursor button Í or Ú to change the number to 02.

h
-I 02

Ê

You can press DEL to delete a contact at the cursor
position.
X Press OK to move the cursor to the third contact field.

You do not need a third relay contact, so you can now wire
the contacts directly to the coil field.

L: 1 C:3 B:7944

71

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

Wiringeasy displays a small arrow l in the circuit diagram whencreating the wiring.
Press ALT to activate the wiring arrow cursor and use thecursor buttons Í Ú ú í to move it.

h

ALT also has two other functions depending on the cursor
position:• In the left contact field, you can press ALT to insert a
new empty rung.
• The contact under the cursor can be changed between
a make and break contact by pressing the ALT button.

ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ-ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊMm lÊÊÊÊlÊÊ-ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ-ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ-L

L: 1 C:1 B:7944h

The wiring arrow works between contacts and relays. Whenyou move the arrow onto a contact or relay coil, it changes
back to the cursor and can be reactivated with ALT if
required.

easy automatically wires adjacent contacts in a rung up to
the coil.
X Press ALT to wire the cursor from I 02 through to the coil

-I 02

field.
The cursor changes into a flashing wiring arrow andautomatically jumps to the next possible wiring position.

l

X Press the cursor button í. Contact I 02 will be connected

up to the coil field.

h72

You can use DEL to erase a connection at the cursor orarrow position. Where connections intersect, the verticalconnections are deleted first, then, if you press DEL again,
the horizontal connections are deleted.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Creating your first circuit
diagram

X Press the cursor button í again.

The cursor will move to the coil field.
--------Ä Q 01

L: 1 C:1 B:7944

X Press OK.

easy inserts the relay coil Q 01. The specified coil function
Ä and the output relay Q 01 are correct and do not have to
be changed.
Your first working easy circuit diagram now looks like this:I 01----I 02-------------------Ä Q 01

L: 1 C:1 B:7944

Figure 43:

Your first circuit diagram= visible area
X Press ESC to leave the circuit diagram display.
The SAVE menu appears.
I 01----I 02-------------------Ä Q 01

SAVE

Figure 44:

SAVE menu= visible area
X Press the OK button.

The circuit diagram is stored.
Once you have connected push-button actuators S1 and S2,
you can test your circuit diagram straight away.

73

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

Testing the circuit diagram
X Switch to the main menu and select the STOP RUN menu

PROGRAM...

option.
With a tick at RUN or STOP you switch to the RUN or STOP
operating modes.

STOP å RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCK

easy runs in the mode indicated by the tick.
X Press the OK button. easy will change to RUN mode.

h

The mode assigned with the tick is always active.
The Status display shows the current mode and theswitching states of the inputs and outputs.

I 12..........
I

MO 14:42

Q 1.......

P-

RUN

X Change to the Status display and press push-button

actuator S1.
The contacts (boxes) for inputs I1 and I2 are activated andrelay Q1 picks up. This is indicated on the numbers which aredisplayed.
Power flow display
easy allows you to check rungs in RUN mode. This meansthat you can check your circuit diagram via the built-in
power flow display while it is being processed by the easy.
X Change to the Circuit diagram display and press push-button actuator S1.
The relay picks up. easy shows the power flow.
I 01====I 02===================Ä Q 01

L: 1 C:1 RUN

Figure 45:

Power flow display: Inputs I1 and I2 are closed, relay
Q1 has picked up= visible area74

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Creating your first circuit
diagram

X Press push-button actuator S2, that has been connected

as a break contact.
The circuit connection is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out.
I 01====I 02-------------------Ä Q 01

L: 1 C:1 RUN

Figure 46:

Power flow display: Input I1 is closed, input I2 is open,
relay Q1 has picked up= visible area
X Press ESC to return to the Status display.

hWith easy you can test parts of a circuit diagram before itis entirely completed.
easy simply ignores any incomplete wiring that is not yetworking and only runs the finished wiring.
Power flow display with Zoom function
easy enables you to check the following at a glance:• all four contacts plus one coil in series• and 3 circuit connections
X Change to the Circuit diagram display and press the ALT

button. Press push-button actuator S1.
â==â========Äâ
L: 001

I 01

Figure 47:

Power flow display in Zoom function: Input I1 and I2
are closed, relay Q1 picked up

â Contact closed, coil is triggered:# Contact opened, coil dropped out

75

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

X Press push-button actuator S2, that has been connected

as a break contact.
The rung is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out.
â==#-------- #L: 001

I 01

Use the cursor buttons Í Ú ú í to move between thecontacts or coil.
X Press the cursor button í.
‚==#-------- #L: 002

I 02

The cursor moves to the second contact.
X Press the ALT button. The display changes to display

status with contact and/or coil designation.
I 01====I 02-------------------Ä Q 01

L: 1 C:2 RUN

Figure 48:

Power flow display: Input I1 is closed, input I2 is open,
relay Q1 has picked up= visible area76

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Creating your first circuit
diagramDeleting the circuit diagram
X Switch the easy to STOP mode.

heasy must be in STOP mode in order to extend, delete or
modify the circuit diagram.
X Use PROGRAM… to switch from the main menu to thenext menu level.
PROGRAM...

DELETE PROGRAM

X Select DELETE PROGRAM

The easy will display the prompt DELETE?
X Press OK to delete the program or ESC to cancel.
X Press ESC to return to the Status display.

Fast circuit diagram entry
You can create a circuit-diagram in several ways: The first
option is to enter the elements in the circuit and then to wire
all the elements together. The other option is to use theenhanced operator guidance of the easy and create thecircuit diagram in one go, from the first contact through to
the last coil.
If you use the first option, you will have to select some of theelements in order to create and connect up your circuit
diagram.
The second, faster option is what you learned in theexample. In this case you create the entire circuit connection
from left to right.

77

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

Configuring an easy-NET
networkIf you want to work with the easy-NET network andcommunicate with several stations, the network must be
configured first.
Proceed as follows:
X Connect all network stations. easy-NET socket 2e toeasy-NET socket 1L.
X The first station 1 (socket 1L) and the last station(socket 2e) must be provided with a network termination
resistor a.
X Connect all stations to the power supply.
a
1
I1 – I12

R1 – R12

Q1 – Q8

S1 – S8

12a

I1 – I12

2
Q1 – Q6

Figure 49:

Example topology with two easy-NET stations

a Network termination resistor
Physical location
Station number
X Switch on the power supply on all stations.
X Ensure that all stations have a voltage supply. The POW

LED must light up or flash. It is only possible to configure
the stations which are supplied with voltage.
X Proceed to the first physical station (Location 1). This
station has the termination resistor inserted in socket 1.

h78

The following tasks are only possible in STOP mode.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Configuring an easy-NET
network

Entering the network station number
X Simultaneously press the DEL and ALT buttons while easy
SECURITY...
SYSTEM...
MENU LANGUAGECONFIGURATOR...

displays the Status display.
The System menu appears
Select the CONFIGURATOR menu option.
X Press the OK button.

The NET menu appears.

NET..
.

X Press the OK button.

NET PARAMETERS..
STATIONS...
CONFIGURE

NET-ID : 00 Æ
BAUDRATE: 125KB
BUSDELAY: 00
SEND IOå æ
REMOTE RUNREMOTE IO
NET-ID : 01 Æ
BAUDRATE: 125KB
BUSDELAY: 00
SEND IOå æ
REMOTE RUNREMOTE IOh

The NET PARAMETERS… menu appears.
X Press the OK button.
X Press the OK button and select the station number with Íand Ú. In this case the station number (NET-ID) “01”.

X Press the OK button.

X Exit the NET PARAMETERS menu with ESC.

The station designated station number 1 is the active
station. For this reason the REMOTE RUN and REMOTE IO
functions are not available.

7908/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

Entering network stations
Only the network station at physical location 1 with station
number 1 has a station list.

h

The left-hand column is the physical location. You can only
assign a physical location to unused station numbers.
Physical location 1 is permanently assigned to station
number 1.
X Use the Í and Ú cursor buttons to select the STATION

menu and press the OK button.
X Proceed to the station with physical address 2.
1
2
3
4

1
0
0
0

Æ

1
2
3
4

1
2
0
0

Æ

æ

æ

X Select the required physical location with the Í and Ú

cursor buttons. Press the OK button.

X Use cursor buttons Í and Ú to select station number 2.
X Press the OK button.

At physical location 2, the station has been assigned station
address 2.
X Press ESC to return to the STATION menu item.

80

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Configuring an easy-NET
network

Configuring an easy-NET network
The easy-NET network can only be configured by station 1.
Requirement:
All stations are correctly connected to the network and thetermination resistors have been connected.
All stations have a power supply and are in STOP mode. The
POW LED is permanently lit. The NET LED is permanently lit.

h

If the connected stations are being configured, all stations
automatically switch to the STOP mode.

NET PARAMETERS..
STATIONS...
CONFIGURE

X Proceed to the CONFIGURE menu item and press the OK

CONFIGURE ?

You will be asked to acknowledge whether you want toconfigure the system.

button.

X Press the OK button.
CONFIGURATIONINPROGRESS.

The message on the left appears:
All NET LEDs on the stations which are assigned station
numbers higher than 1 (2 to 8) switch to the OFF state ofeasy-NET.
As soon as the configuration has been successfullycompleted, the NET LEDs on all stations flash. The easy-NET
network is ready for operation.

h
ERR:ID-KONFLIKTCONFIGURATIONOVERWRITE?

An error message will appear if a station is assigned witha station address which does not correspond to thephysical location in the station list.
If you want to overwrite the station address press the OK
button. The configuration can be aborted by pressing the
ESC button.

81

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Commissioning

Changing the easy-NET network configuration
The configuration of the easy-NET network can be modified
at any time at station 1, physical location 1.
X The NET parameters are modified as described for

inputting parameters for the first time.
Station addresses in the STATIONS menu are changed asfollows:
X Go to the physical location which is to be modified.
X Press the OK button.

h

Existing station numbers can only be modified to free,
non-assigned station numbers. If all eight numbers are
assigned, all station numbers which are to be modifiedmust be set to zero. Thereafter, all station numbers can bereassigned. (easy800 sets all station numbers to zero
which are assigned with a physical location behind theleading zero.)
X Select the required station number with the Í and Ú

cursor buttons and confirm your input with the OK button.
X Configure all easy-NET stations again using the

CONFIGURATION menu.

h82

Further information concerning the easy-NET network
topic can be found in Chapter “easy-NET network”,
Page 247.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Configuring an easy-NET
network

Displaying the Status display of other stations
On every device with a display, you can display the states of
the inputs and outputs of each network station.
1I12..........
I NT1

MO 06:42

1Q1.......

I NT3

3Q1.3..6..

MO 06:45

3S1.3..6..

The cursor changes to the display of the network station NT..
and flashes. The station number is displayed in front of the
inputs and outputs.
X Change to the number of the required station with the ÍP-and Ú cursor buttons.
X Press the OK button.

RUN

3R12.....7....
I NT3 DCP-

RUN

3I12.....7....
MO 06:42

X Change to the Status display and press the ESC button.

X If you want to view the state of the inputs and outputs of
P-

RUN

h

a local expansion, press the OK button.
If you press the ESC button again or the OK button, thedisplay of the input and output states of the station is
terminated.
The station showing the status on its display cannot read
its own data from the network.
Example: NT3 flashes on station 3. The inputs and outputs
3I.., 3R.., 3Q.. and 3S.. cannot be displayed.
If the NT3 display is not flashing, the inputs and outputs
are shown.

83

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

84

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

4

Wiring with easy800

This chapter describes all the functions available witheasy800.

easy800 operation

Buttons for drawing circuit diagrams and function
block usage
Delete circuit connection, contact, relay or empty line in thecircuit diagram

DEL
ALT

Toggle between break and make contact
Connect contacts and relays
Add rungsÍÚú íChange values
Cursor up, down
Change position
Cursor left, right

Cursor buttons set as P buttons:úí

Input P1,
Input P3,

ÍÚ

Input P2
Input P4

Undo setting from previous OK
Exit current display or menu

ESC

OK

*

Change, add contact/relay
Save setting
Terminal mode on/off

85

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Operation
The cursor buttons in the easy800 circuit diagram perform
three functions. The current mode is indicated by theappearance of the flashing cursor.
• Move• Entering• Connect

â In Move mode you can use ÍÚ ú í to move the cursor

around the circuit diagram in order to select a rung, contact
or relay coil.

I 01

Use OK to switch to Entry mode so that you can enter orchange a value at the current cursor position. If you press
ESC in Entry mode, easy800 will undo the most recentchanges.

l relays. Press ALT again to return to Move.

Press ALT to switch to Connect mode for wiring contacts andPress ESC to leave the circuit diagram and parameter
display.

heasy800 performs many of these cursor movements
automatically. For example, easy800 switches the cursor
to Move mode if no further entries or connections are
possible at the selected cursor position.
Opening the parameter display for function blocks
with contacts or relays
If you specify the contact or coil of a function relay type in
Entry mode, easy800 automatically switches from thecontact number to the function block parameter display
when you press OK.
Press í to switch to the next contact or coil field without
entering any parameters.

86

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800 operation

Program
A program is a sequence of commands which the easy800
executes cyclically in RUN mode. An easy800 program
consists of the necessary settings for the device, easy-NET,
password, system settings, a circuit diagram and/or function
blocks.
The circuit diagram is that part of the program where thecontacts are connected together. In RUN mode a coil isswitched on and off in accordance with the current flow andthe coil function specified.
Function blocks
Function blocks are program elements with special
functions. Example: timing relays, time switches, arithmetic
function blocks. Function blocks are provided with orwithout contacts and coils accordingly. In RUN mode thefunction blocks are processed according to the circuit
diagram and the results are updated accordingly.
Examples:Timing relay = function block with contacts and coils
Time switch = function block with contacts
RelaysRelays are switching devices which are electronicallysimulated in easy800. They actuate their contacts according
to their designated function. A relay consists of a coil and at
least one contact.
Contacts
You modify the current flow with the contacts in the easy800
circuit diagram. Contacts such as make contacts carry a 1
signal when closed and 0 when open. Every contact in theeasy800 circuit diagram can be defined as either a makecontact or a break contact.

87

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Coils
Coils are the actuating mechanisms of relays. In RUN mode,
the results of the wiring are sent to the coils, which switch
on or off accordingly. Coils can have seven different coilfunctions.
Table 4:

Usable contacts

Contact

easy800 display

Make contact, open in release
position
Break contact, closed in released
positionI, Q, M, A, ….

Other contacts a Tablei, q, m, a, …
Other contacts a Table

easy800 works with different contacts, which can be used inany order in the contact fields of the circuit diagram.
Table 5:
Contact

Contacts

Make
contact

Breakcontact

Number

Page

*I

*i

01…12

250

easy800 input terminal

I

i

01…12

–

Cursor button

P

p

01…04

–

*R

*î

01…12

250

R

î

01…12

–

*RN

*RN

01…32

250

Inputs
Inputs of a network station* = Station address 1 to 8

Network station expansion input
terminal* = Station address 1 to 8
Expansion input terminal
Bit inputs via the network* = Station address 1 to 888

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contact

easy800 operation

Make
contact

Breakcontact

Number

Page

*I

*i

14

299

*I

*i

15…16

297

Expansion status

I

i

14

299

Short-circuit/overload

I

i

15…16

297

*R

*î

15…16

297

R

î

15…16

297

*Q

*Q

01…08

250

Q

q

01…08

–

*S

*ï

01…08

250

S

ï

01…08

–

*SN

*SN

01…32

250

Marker relay contact

M

m

01…96

97

Jump label

:

01…32

208

Diagnostics messages

ID

ID

01…16

260

A X Q1A X Q1

X=01…32

125

AR X CYaî X CY

X=01…32

128

Diagnostics inputs
Network station expansion status* = Station address 1 to 8
Network station short-circuit/overload* = Station address 1 to 8

Short-circuit/overload in expansion
network station* = Station address 1 to 8
Short circuit/overload with expansion
Outputs
easy800 output easy network station* = Station address 1 to 8
easy800 output
easy800 output expansion with
network station* = Station address 1 to 8
easy800 output expansion
Bit outputs via the network* = Station address 1 to 8
Other contacts

Function blocks
Analog value comparator function
block
Arithmetic value overflow (CARRY)
function block89

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Contact

Zero arithmetic value (zero)function block
Data block comparator function
block, error: number of elements
exceeded
Data block comparator function
block, error: range overlap
Data block comparator function
block, error: invalid offset
Data block comparator function
block, comparison result
Data block comparator function
block, error: number of elements
exceeded
Data block transfer function block,error: range overlap
Data block transfer function block,error: invalid offset
Boolean sequence function block,value zeroCounter function block, upper
setpoint value exceeded (Overflow)
Counter function block, lower
setpoint value undershot(Fall below)
Counter function block, actual
value equal to zeroCounter function block, actual value
has exceeded counter range (CARRY)
Frequency counter function block,
upper setpoint value exceeded(Overflow)

90

Make
contact

Breakcontact

NumberPage

AR X ZE

aî X ZE

X=01…32

128

BC X E1

BC X E1

X=01…32

132

BC X E2

BC X E2

X=01…32

132

BC X E3

BC X E3

X=01…32

132

BC X EQBC X EQ

X=01…32

139

BT X E1

BT X E1

X=01…32

139

BT X E2

BT X E2

X=01…32

139

BT X E3

BT X E3

X=01…32

139

BV X ZEBV X ZE

X=01…32

150

C X OFC X OF

X=01…32

153

C X FBc X FB

X=01…32

153

C X ZEc X ZE

X=01…32

153

C X CYc X CY

X=01…32

153

CF X OFCF X OF

X=01…04160

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contact

Frequency counter function block,
lower setpoint value undershot (Fallbelow)
Frequency counter function block,actual value equal to zeroHigh-speed counter function block,
upper setpoint value exceeded(Overflow)
High-speed counter function block,
lower setpoint value undershot (Fallbelow)
High-speed counter function block,actual value equal to zeroHigh-speed counter function block,actual value has exceeded counter
range (CARRY)
Incremental encoder counter function
block, upper setpoint value exceeded(Overflow)
Incremental encoder counter function
block, lower setpoint value undershot(Fall below)
Incremental encoder counter function
block, actual value equal to zero
Incremental encoder counter function
block, actual value has exceeded
counter range (CARRY)
Comparator function block,less thaneasy800 operation

Make
contact

Breakcontact

NumberPage

CF X FB

CF X FB

X=01…04160

CF X ZE

CF X ZE

X=01…04

160

CH X OFCH X OF

X=01…04

164

CH X FBCH X FB

X=01…04

164

CH X ZE

CH X ZE

X=01…04

164

CH X CY

CH X CY

X=01…04

164

CI X OFCI X OF

X=01…02170

CI X FBCI X FB

X=01…02170

CI X ZE

CI X ZE

X=01…02170

CI X CYCI X CY

X=01…02170

CP X LTCP X LT

X=01…32175

91

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Makecontact

Breakcontact

NumberPage

CP X EQ

CP X EQ

X=01…32

175

CP X GTCP X GT

X=01…32

175

Text output function block

D X Q1

ì X Q1

X=01…32

177

Data function block

DB X Q1

DB X Q1

X=01…32

181

DC X LIDC X LI

X=01…32

183

Receive a variable from a station (Get)

GT X Q1

GT X Q1

X=01…32

183

Seven-day time switch

HW X Q1

HW X Q1

X=01…32

194

Year time switch function block

HY X Q1

HY X Q1

X=01…32

200

MR X Q1

MR X Q1

X=01…32

211

OT X Q1OT X Q1

X=01…04

218

Contact

Comparator function block,equal toComparator function block,greater than

PID controller, value range ofmanipulated variable exceeded

Master reset, sets all outputs andmarkers to zero state
Operating hours counter function
block, set time reached92

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Contact

Operating hours counter, value
overflow (CARRY)
Send a variable to the network,
enable active Put
Pulse width modulation, error
minimum on or off time exceeded
Send date and time via the network(easy-NET) function block
Timing relay function blockeasy800 operation

Make
contact

Breakcontact

NumberPage

OT X CYOT X CY

X=01…04

218

PT X Q1

PT X Q1

X=01…32219

PW X E1PW X E1

X=01…02

221

SC X Q1SC X Q1

X=01

224

T X Q1T X Q1

X=01…32228

93

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Usable relays and function blocks (coils)
easy800 various relay types as well as function blocks andtheir coils for wiring in a circuit diagram.
Relay/function blockeasy800
display

NumberCoilParameter

*Q

01…08

j

–

Q

01…08

j

–

*S

01…08

j

–

S

01…08

j

–

*SN

01…32

j

–

Marker, auxiliary relay

M

01…96

j

–

Jump label

:

01…32

j

–

A

01…32

–

j

Arithmetic function block

AR

01…32

–

j

Data block comparator, activate

BC X EN

01 32

j

j

Transfer data block, trigger coil

BT X T_

01 32

j

j

Boolean sequence

BV

01…32

–

j

Counter function block, counter input

C X C_

X=01…32jjCounter function block, directionC X D_

X=01…32

jj

C X SE

X=01…32jj

Outputs
easy800 output relays, network
stations (only network master)* = Station address 2 to 8
easy800 output relay
easy800 output relay expansion,
network stations (only network
master)* = Station address 2 to 8
easy800 expansion output relay
Bit outputs* = Station address 1 to 8
General coils

Function blocks
Analog value comparator function
blockCounter function block, set countervalue (Preset)

94

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Relay/function blockeasy800 operation

easy800
display

NumberCoilParameterC X RE

X=01…32jj

CF X EN

X=01…04jj

CH X D_

X=01…04jj

CH X EN

X=01…04jj

CH X SE

X=01…04jj

CH X RE

X=01…04jj

CI X SE

X=01…02jj

CI X EN

X=01…02jj

CI X RE

X=01…02jjCP

X=01…32–

j

D X EN

X=01…32jj

Data function block, trigger coil

DB X T_

X=01…32jj

PID controller, activate

DC X EN

X=01…32jj

PID controller, activate P component

DC X EP

X=01…32jj

PID controller, activate I component

DC X EI

X=01…32jj

PID controller, activate D component

DC X ED

X=01…32jj

DC X SE

X=01…32

jj

FT X EN

X=01…32jjGT

X=01…32–jCounter function block, reset countervalue
Frequency counter function block,activate counter (enable)
High-speed counter function block,direction
High-speed counter function block,activate counter (enable)
High-speed counter function block,set counter value (Preset)
High-speed counter function block,reset counter value
Incremental encoder counter function
block, set counter value (Preset)
Incremental encoder counter function
block, activate counter (enable)
Incremental encoder counter function
block, reset counter value
Comparator function block
Activate text output function block(enable)PID controller, accept manual
manipulated variable
Activate signal smoothing filter
Get from network station function
block

95

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Relay/function blockeasy800
display

NumberCoilParameter

Seven-day time switch

HW

X=01…32–jYear time switch function block

HY

X=01…32–j

Activate value scaling function block

LS X EN

X=01…32jj

Master reset function block

MR X T_

X=01…32jj

NC X EN

X=01 32

jj

OT X EN

X=01…04

jj

OT X RE

X=01…04jj

PT X T_

X=01…32

jj

PW X EN

X=01…02jj

SC X T_

X=01

j

–

ST X EN

X=01

T X EN

X=01…32

jj

Timing relay function block, stopT X ST

X=01…32

jj

Timing relay function block, reset

T X RE

X=01…32

jj

VC X EN

X=01…32jj

Activate numerical converter function
block
Function block operating hours
counter, enable
Operating hours counter function
block, reset
Send to the network (easy-NET)function block, trigger
Activate pulse width modulation
function block
Send time to the network (easy-NET)function block, trigger
Activate set cycle time function block
Timing relay function block,
trigger control coil (enable)

Activate value limitation functionblock

The switching behaviour of these relays is set by the coilfunctions and parameters selected.
The options for setting output and marker relays are listedwith the description of each coil function.
The function block coil functions and parameters are listedwith the description of each function block type.

96

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800 operation

Markers, analog operands
Certain defined markers are available for actively addressing
values or inputs/outputs.
Table 6:
Markers

easy800
display

Markers
Number

Value
range

Access typer = Readw = Write

AnalogoperandMarker 32 bit

MD

01…96

32 bitr, wMarker 16 bit

MW

01…96

16 bitr, wMarker 8 bit

MB

01…96

8 bit

r, w

Marker 1 bit

M

1…96

1 bit

r, w

IA X

X=01…04

10 bit

r

QA X

X=01

10 bitr, w

Analog inputs
basic unit
Analog output

The following applies if you want to use the binary operands(contacts) from the markers MD, MW, MB:
Table 7:

Composition of the markers

Appliesto MD,
MW, MB,M

Left = mostsignificant bit,byte, word

Right = leastsignificant bit,byte, word

32 bitMD1

16 bit

MW2

8 bit

MB4

MB3

MB2

MB1

1 bit

M32 to M25

M24 to M17

M16 to M9M8 to M1

32 bitMD2

16 bit

MW4

8 bit

MB8

MB7

MB6

MB5

1 bit

M64 to M57

M56 to M49

M48 to M41

M40 to M33

MW1

MW3

97

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Appliesto MD,
MW, MB,M

Left = mostsignificant bit,byte, word

32 bitMD3

16 bit

MW6

8 bit

MB12

MB11

MB10

MB9

1 bit

M96 to M89

M88 to M81

M80 to M73

M72 to M65

32 bitMD4

16 bit

MW8

8 bit

MB16

32 bitMD5

16 bit

MW10

8 bit

MB20

Right = leastsignificant bit,byte, word

MW5

MW7
MB15

MB14

MB13

MW9
MB19

MB18

MB17

…
…
…
32 bitMD23

16 bit

MW46

8 bit

MB92

32 bitMD24

16 bit

MW48

8 bit

MB96

32 bitMD25

16 bitMW50

32 bitMD26

16 bit

MW52

MW45
MB91

MB90

MW47
MB95

MB94

MW49

MW51

…
…

98

32 bitMD48

16 bit

MW96

MB89

MW95

MB93

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800 operation

Appliesto MD,
MW, MB,M

Left = mostsignificant bit,byte, word

32 bitMD49

32 bit

MD50

Right = leastsignificant bit,byte, word…
32 bitMD95

32 bitMD96h

You should only write the markers once.
Marker double words always contain all data formats. Whenseveral write accesses to MD, MW, MB or M (within an MD)
are made, it is the last write operation that is retained.

Number formats
easy makes computations with a signed 31 bit value.
The value range is:–2147483648 to +2147483647
The 32nd bit is the sign bit with a 31 bit value.
Bit 32 = state “0” means a positive number.
Example:00000000000000000000010000010010bin =412hex = 1042dec
Bit 32 = state 1 means a negative number.
Example:11111111111111111101110010101110
bin = FFFFDCAEhex = –9042dech

The marker byte (MB) and marker word (MW) number
formats are unsigned.
99

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Circuit diagram display
In the easy800 circuit diagram, contacts and coils of relays
are connected up from left to right - from the contact to thecoil. The circuit diagram is created on a hidden wiring gridcontaining contact fields, coil fields and circuit connections.
It is then wired up with connections.
• Insert contacts in the four contact fields. The firstcontact field on the left is automatically connected to thevoltage.
• Insert the relay coil to be controlled together with its
function and designation in the coil field. The coil
designation consists of the coil name, coil number andfunction block from the function designation. The coilfunction defines the method of operation of the coil.
• Every line in the circuit diagram forms a rung. With theeasy800 up to 256 circuit connections can be wired in acircuit diagram
Contact fields (1 to 4)
Circuit
Status line

I 01----I 02----CP01GT---------Ä Q 01
Q 01----HY01Q1k''''''' ''''''' ''''''''''''''' ''''''' ''''''' ''''''' ''''''''
L: 1 C:1 B:____

Circuit

Number of thecircuit
Number of
the field in thecircuit100

Coil field (5)Amount of freememory in bytes

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy800 operation• Connections are used to produce the electrical contact
between relay contacts and the coils. They can be createdacross several circuit connections. Each point ofintersection is a connection.
• The number of free bytes is displayed so that you canrecognise how much memory is available for the circuit
diagram and function blocks.

I 01----I 02--Q 01----HY01Q1k
L:

1 C:1 B:7840

easy800 circuit diagram display
For improved readability, the circuit diagram display of theeasy800 shows two contacts per circuit connection or one
contact plus a series coil. A total of 16 characters per circuit
connection and three circuit connections plus a status line
can be displayed simultaneously.
You can move between the contact fields with the ú í cursor
buttons. The number of the circuit connection and thecontact are displayed in the lower status line.

h

The circuit diagram display performs two functions:• In STOP mode it is used to edit the circuit diagram.
• In RUN mode it is used to check the circuit diagram
using the Power flow display.

Saving and loading programs
easy800 provides you with two ways of saving circuit
diagrams externally:• By saving to a memory card
• By saving to a PC running EASY-SOFT (-PRO) with EASY .
Once they have been saved, programs can be reloaded into
easy800, edited and run.
All program data is saved in easy800. In the event of a power
failure the data will be retained until the next time it isoverwritten or deleted.

101

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Memory card
Each memory card contains a circuit diagram which isinserted into the easy800 interface.
The easy800 behaves in the following manner in accordancewith the type and setting.
Requirement:
A valid circuit diagram must be stored on the card.
Variants with display:
X Go to the CARD menu and load the circuit diagram into

the unit in STOP mode via CARD r DEVICE.
CARD MODE setting a page 280.
Variants without display:
If the circuit diagram on the card is different to the circuit
diagram in the device, the program from the card is loaded
as soon as the power supply is turned on.
EASY-SOFT (-PRO)
EASY-SOFT (-PRO) is a PC program for creating, testing andmanaging easy800 and circuit diagrams.
Completed programs are exchanged between the PC andeasy800 via the connection cable. Once you have transferreda circuit diagram, simply run easy800 straight from your PC.

102

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts
and relays

Working with contacts andrelaysIn easy800 circuit diagrams, the switches, buttons and relaysof conventional circuit diagrams are connected up using
input contacts and relay coils.
Conventional circuit

S1

S2

K1

easy800 circuit diagram
easy800 connection
Connect make contact S1 to input
terminal I1
Connect make contact S2 to input
terminal I2Connect load H1 to output Q1
S1 or S2 switches on H1.

K1

H1

easy800 circuit diagram:I 01--u---------------------Ä Q 01
I 02--kFirst specify which input and output terminals you wish touse in your circuit.
The signal states on the input terminals are detected in thecircuit diagram with the input contacts I, R* or RN. The
outputs are switched in the circuit diagram with the output
relays Q, S or SN.

I 02
Contact nameEntering and changing contacts and relay function
coils
Contacts
An input contact is selected in the easy800 via the contactname and contact number.
Example: input contact

Contact number

103

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

CP01GT function block, the number and the contact function.

A contact of a function relay is assigned with the name of theContact nameExample: contact comparator function blockContact number
Contact function

2RN02 station is placed before the contact name.

If the contact on a network station is used, the address of the
Example: contact of an easy-NET station

Station address
Contact nameContact number

S Q 04 With a relay coil or function block select the coil function, coilCoils

or function block name, coil or function block number as wellas coil of the function block. With coils of an easy-NET
network station, the network address is selected before thecoil name.

Coil function
Coil nameCoil numberÄ T 04EN

Example: relay coil output
Relay coil function block - timing relay with control coil

Coil function
Coil nameCoil number
Function block

S2SN04

Relay coil of an easy-NET station

Coil function
Station address
Coil nameCoil numberh104

A full list of all the contacts and relays is given in theoverview starting on Page 88.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts andrelaysI 01 mode. The value to be changed flashes.

Values for contacts and coil fields are changed in Entry
easy800 proposes the contact I 01 or the coil Ä Q 01
when starting entries in an empty field.

h

X Move the cursor using the buttons ú í ÍÚ to a contact orcoil field.
X Press OK to switch to Entry mode.
X Use ú i to select the position you wish to change, or press
OK to jump to the next position.
X Use ÍÚ to modify the value at the position.
easy800 will leave Entry mode when you press ú í or OK toleave a contact field or coil field.
In the contact field to change
I 01 to I 02

In the coil field to change
Ä Q 01 to S Q 08

I 01

Ä Q 01

Q
M
HW

í
or
OK

I 01
02

Í

I 02

ä

ú

Ä Q 01
M

03

S

T

04

R
È
è
Å

C

í
or
OK

Ä Q

01
02

.

05

D

.

T

.

S

.

P

.

:

D

.

…

S

99

:

…

….

Ä Q 08

03

C

í
or
OK

Ú

08

í
or
OK

105

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Deleting contacts and coils
X Move the cursor using the buttons ú í ÍÚ to a contact orcoil field.
X Press DEL.
The contact or the coil will be deleted, together with any
connections.
Changing make contacts to break contacts
Every contact in the easy800 circuit diagram can be definedas either a make contact or a break contact.
X Switch to Entry mode and move the cursor over thecontact name.
X Press ALT. The make contact will change to a breakcontact.
X Press OK 2 x to confirm the change.
I 02--u--I 03--k

I 03--k

2x

ALT

Figure 50:l

I 02--u----I 02--u---i 03--kê

OK

Change contact I 03 from make to break

Creating and modifying connections
Contacts and relay coils are connected with the arrow in theConnect mode. easy800 displays the cursor in this mode as
an arrow.
X Use ú í ÍÚ to move the cursor onto the contact field or

coil field from which you wish to create a connection.

h106

Do not position the cursor on the first contact field. At thisposition the ALT button has a different function (Insertrung).

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts andrelaysX Press ALT to switch to Connect mode.

X Use ú í to move the diagonal arrow between the contact

fields and coil fields and ÍÚ to move between rungs.
X Press ALT to leave Connect mode.

easy800 will leave the mode automatically when you movethe diagonal arrow onto a contact field or coil field which
has already been assigned.

hIn a circuit connection, easy800 automatically connects
contacts and the terminal to the relay coil if there are no
empty fields in-between.
Never work backwards. You will learn why wiring backwards
does not work in Section “Effects on the creation of thecircuit diagram” on Page 290.
I 01----Q 04----i 03--oz---------------kh-I 02----I 04-----------S Q 02

Figure 51:

Circuit diagram with five contacts, invalid

When wiring more than four contacts in series, use one of
the 96 M marker relays.
I 01----Q 04----i 03-----------S M 01
I 02----I 04----M 01-----------S Q 02

Figure 52:

Circuit diagram with M marker relay

Deleting connections
X Move the cursor onto the contact field or coil field to theright of the connection that you want to delete. Press ALT
to switch to Connect mode.
X Press DEL.
easy800 will delete a connection. Closed adjacentconnections will be retained.

107

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

If several circuit connections are connected to one another,easy800 first deletes the vertical connection. If you press
DEL again, it will delete the horizontal connection as well.

h

You cannot delete connections that easy800 has createdautomatically.
Close the delete operation with ALT or by moving the cursor
to a contact or coil field.

Inserting and deleting a circuit connection
The easy800 circuit diagram display shows three of the 256
circuit connections on the display at the same time. easy800
automatically scrolls up or down the display to show hidden
circuit connections – even empty ones – if you move thecursor past the top or bottom of the display.
A new circuit connection is added below the last connection
or inserted above the cursor position:
X Position the cursor on the first contact field of a rung.
X Press ALT.

The existing circuit connection with all its additional
connections is “shifted” downwards. The cursor is thenpositioned directly in the new circuit connection.
I 02--u-----I 03--k

Figure 53:

108

I 02--u------n
I 03--kInserting a new circuit connection

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts andrelaysSaving circuit diagrams
X Press the ESC button to save a circuit diagram.
I 01----I 02--Q 01----HY01Q1k
SAVE

Æ
æ

The menu on the left appears in the status line.
X Press OK to save the entire program, circuit diagram andfunction blocks.
After saving you will be in the CIRCUIT DIAGRAM menu.

Aborting circuit diagram entry
I 01----I 02--Q 01----HY01Q1k
CANCELÆæ

X If you want to exit without saving the circuit diagram,press ESC.
X Use the cursor buttons ÍÚ to select the CANCEL menu.
X Press OK.
The circuit diagram is closed without saving.

Searching for contacts and coils
I 01----I 02--Q 01----HY01Q1k
SEARCHÆæ

I 01----I 02--Q 01----HY01Q1k
SEARCH

I 01

You search for contacts and coils in the following manner:
X Press ESC. Use the cursor buttons ÍÚ to select the

SEARCH menu.
X Press OK.
X Select the desired contact, coil and number with the Ú andú í cursor buttons.
With function relays, select the function block, the number
and the coil.

X Confirm the search with the OK button.

109

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

I 01----I 02--Q 01----HY01Q1k
L:

1 C:1 B:7140

The first contact or coil from the call position to the end of
the circuit diagram is sought. If no contact or coil is found,the easy800 circuit diagram editor will continue the searchfrom the start of the circuit diagram. If a contact or coil isfound, the easy800 editor automatically jumps to therespective field in the circuit diagram.

“Go to” a circuit connection
The easy800 circuit diagram editor provides a Go To functionin order to enable fast access to a circuit connection.
X Press ESC and use the ÍÚ cursor buttons to select the GO

I 01----I 02---

TO menu.
X Press OK.
X Select the required rung (L... …) with the ÍÚ cursor
buttons.

L:

The first contact on the circuit connection is always
indicated.

Q 01----HY01Q1k
1 C:1 B:7140

X Press OK.
I 01----I 02---

Q 01----HY01Q1k
L:The cursor remains stationary at the required circuit
connection contact L 1.

1 C:1 B:7140

Deleting the rungeasy800 only removes empty circuit connections (without
contacts or coils).
X Delete all the contacts and coils from the circuit

connection.
X Position the cursor on the first contact field of the empty

circuit connection.
X Press DEL.

110

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts andrelays

The subsequent circuit connection(s) will be “pulled up” andany existing links between circuit connections will be
retained.

Switching via the cursor buttons
With easy800, you can also use the four cursor buttons as
hard-wired inputs in the circuit diagram.
P02
P01

The buttons are wired in the circuit diagram as contacts
P 01 to P 04. The P buttons can be activated andP03 deactivated in the h System menu.

P04

The P buttons can also be used for testing circuits or manual
operation. These button functions are also useful forservicing and commissioning purposes.
Example 1
A lamp at output Q1 is switched on and off via inputs I1 andI2 or by using cursor buttons ÍÚ.
IPIP

01--u------------------------S Q 01
02--k02--u------------------------R Q 01
04--k

Figure 54:

Switch Q1 via I1, I2, Í, or Ú

Example 2
Input I1 is used to control output Q1. I5 switches over tocursor operation and via m 01 disconnects the rung I 01.
I 05---------------------------S M 01
I 01----m 01--u----------------S Q 01
P 01----M 01--k

Figure 55:hI5 switches over to the cursor buttons.

The P buttons are only detected as switches in the Status
menu.

111

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

The Status menu display shows whether the P buttons areused in the circuit diagram.
I123456789…
MO 14:55
Q.2…6.8

Displayed on the Status display:
P2

RUN• P: button function wired and active• P2: button function wired, active and P2 button Í pressed• P-: button function wired and not active• Empty field: P buttons not used

Checking the circuit diagram
easy800 contains a built-in measuring device enabling you
to monitor the switching states of contacts, relays andfunction block coils during operation.
X Create the small parallel circuit below and save it.
I 02--u------------------------S Q 01
I 03--kFigure 56:

Parallel circuit

X Switch easy800 to RUN mode via the main menu.
X Return to the circuit diagram display.

You are now unable to edit the circuit diagram.

h

If you switch to the circuit diagram display and are unable
to modify a circuit diagram, first check whether easy800 is
in STOP mode.
The circuit diagram display performs two functions
depending on the mode:• STOP: Creation of the circuit diagram• RUN: Power flow display
X Switch on I3.

112

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts andrelays

I 02--U------------------------S Q 04
I 03--k
L:001 C:1

Figure 57:

RUN

Power flow display

In the power flow display, energized connections are thicker
than non-energized connections.
You can follow a current-carrying connection across all
circuit connections by scrolling the display up and down.
The bottom right of the power flow display indicates that thecontroller is in RUN mode. (a Section “Power flow display
with Zoom function”Page 75).
.

h

The power flow display will not show signal fluctuations in
the millisecond range. This is due to the inherent delay
factor of LCD displays.

Function block editor
The easy800 has the FUNCTION RELAYS menu in order toedit the function blocks without circuit diagrams. The
function blocks are an inherent component of the program.

113

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Calling the function blocks via the FUNCTION RELAYS
menu
Function, special function,
parameter display
Displays thefunctionblocks used'''' ''' ''' ''''' '''
''''

L:001

Current cursor
line

B:''''

Free memory in bytes
Figure 58:

Explanation of the function block display

Display of the function blocks for editing
Unit/special function
Function
Function block number

Parameter display(+ appears/– does not appear)

Function block name'''' ''' ''' 'Function block inputs>I1 '''''''''''>I2 '''''''''''

Function block outputs

QV> '''''''''''

Variable, operand for
inputsVariable, operand for outputs
Figure 59:

Function block display during editing

Editing function blocks
X Go to the FUNCTION RELAYS menu.
X Press the OK button.
The following display appears if no function blocks arepresent.

''
L:001

B:7898The cursor flashes.
X Press the OK button.

114

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts andrelays

The editor for inputting a function block is displayed.
Select the desired function block and number with theÍÚú í cursor buttons.

AR01
L:001

B:7988The functions of the individual function blocks are explainedin the description of the individual blocks on the following
pages.

AR01 ADD+

The following display appears if function blocks areavailable.

T 18 ?X-The function blocks are created in the sequence in which
they were edited.

CP10

L:001

+

B:6488Calling up function blocks from the circuit diagram
If you enter a function block parameter from the circuit
diagram, you will jump from the circuit diagram editor to thefunction block editor automatically. Once you have assigned
the parameters, you will return to the position where you left
the circuit diagram with Save or Cancel. The operation iscarried out in the same way as with circuit diagram
operation.
T 01 X?

M:S +>I1 20:30>I2

QV>MD96

L:001

B:7808

Example: timing relay function block
Function block:

Timing relays

Switch function:

On-delayed with random switching

Time range:

M:S (Minute:Seconds)

Set time >I1:

20 min 30 s

Actual time QV>:

Copied to MD96115

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Assigning operands to an > input of a function blockh

Only the following variables can be assigned to the input
of a function block:• Constants, e.g.: 42,• Markers such as MD, MW, MB,• Analog output QA ,• Analog inputs IA,• All output variables of the function blocks …QV>Assigning operands to a QV> output of a function
block

h

T 01 X?

M:S +>I1 '':30

Only markers such as MD, MW, MB or the analog output
QA can be assigned to a variable output of a function
block.
Deleting operands on the function block inputs/
outputs
Position the cursor on the required operand.
X Press the DEL button.

>I2

QV>MD96

T 01 X?
>I1 ''

M:S +The operand is deleted.

>I2

QV>MD96

L:001

B:7808AR01 ADD+

T 18 ?X

-

CP10

L:002

+

B:7808

Deleting an entire function block
Ensure that all contacts and coils of the function block aredeleted.
X Select the required function block from the list.

In this case CP10.
X Press the DEL button.

116

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

AR01 ADD

Working with contacts andrelays+T 18 ?XThe function block is erased.

-

Checking function blocks

L:001

You can check function blocks in the same way as circuit
diagrams. The device is in RUN mode.
Checking from the circuit diagram:
Position the cursor on a contact or a coil of the required
function block. Press OK.

T 01 X?
>I1
>I2

M:S +

20:30

The function block will be displayed, in this case a timing
relay.
• >I1= set time of the timing relay,• QV> = the actual value is 14 minutes 42 seconds,• The enable coil is actuated, EN is visible.

QV> 14:42.. EN..

If a coil of a function block is actuated in RUN mode, the coilname with the coil designation will appear on the display.
Checking the function block via the function block
editor:
You access the function block list via the FUNCTION RELAYS
menu.
Select the required function block:
AR01 ADD+In this case the arithmetic function block AR01 in the Addermode.

T 18 ?X-X Press the OK button.

+

The function block is presented with the actual values andthe result.

CP10

L:001

+

RUN

AR01 ADD
>I1
>I2

20056
1095

QV> 21151

Displaying the operands when checking the function
blocks:If you want to know which operands are used on thefunction block inputs and outputs when checking thefunction block, press the ALT button on the displayed value.

117

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

AR01 ADD>I1>I2

C 01QV>+1095

QV> MD 56

The operand is displayed.
• >I1 = Actual value of counter C 01
• >I2 = Constant 1095
• QV> = Marker double word MD56
X Press the ALT button again.

AR01 ADD
>I1
>I2

20056

+

The display shows the values.

1095

QV> 21151

Coil functions
You can set the coil function to determine the switching
behaviour of relay coils. The following coil functions are
assigned to all coils:
Table 8:easy800 display

Coil function

ExampleÄContactor function

ÄQ01,ÄD02,ÄS04,Ä:01,ÄM07,..

ä

Impulse relay function

äQ03,äM04,äD08,äS07,ä:01,..

S

Set

SQ08,SM02,SD03,SS04..

R

Reset

RQ04,RM05,RD07,RS03..

Å

Contactor function with negatedresultÅQ06, ÅM96..

È

Cycle pulse with rising edge

ÈM01..

è

Cycle pulse with falling edgeèM42..

h118

Coil function

The function block descriptions state which coil functions
can be used with the function block concerned.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts andrelaysRules for wiring relay coils
Relay with contactor functionhA coil should only be used once in order to retain an
overview of the relay states. However, retentive coilfunctions such as S, R, ä can be used several times.
The following applies to non-retentive coil functions suchas Ä (contactor), Å (negated contactor), È, è (rising andfalling edge detection): Each coil must only be used once.
The last coil in the circuit diagram determines the status of
the relay.
Exception: When working with jumps, the same coil canbe used twice.
Coil with contactor function Ä
The output signal follows immediately after the input signal
and the relay acts as a contactor.
onon

Figure 60:

Signal diagram of contactor function

Impulse relay ä
The relay coil switches whenever the input signal changes
from 0 to 1. The relay behaves like a bistable flip-flop.
:

on

on

Figure 61:

Signal diagram of impulse relay119

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

A coil is automatically switched off if the power fails and ifeasy is in STOP mode. Exception: Retentive coils retain signal
1 (see a Section “Retention”, Page 283).
“Set” S and “Reset” R coil function
The “Set” S and “Reset” R coil functions are normally usedin pairs.
The relay picks up when the coil is set (A) and remains in thisstate until it is reset (B) by the coil function.
The supply voltage is switched off (C), the coil does not havea retentive effect.
on

S

on

R

on

A

Figure 62:

BC

Signal diagram of “Set” and “reset”

If both coils are triggered at the same time, priority is given
to the coil in the circuit diagram with the higher circuit
connection number. This is shown in the above signal
diagram in section B.
I 05---------------------------S Q 01
I 10---------------------------R Q 01

Figure 63:

Simultaneous triggering of Q 01

In the example above, the reset coil has priority withsimultaneous triggering of the set and reset coils.

120

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Working with contacts andrelaysCoil negation (inverse contactor function) ÅThe output signal is simply an inversion of the input signal;
the relay operates like a contactor whose contacts have been
negated. If the coil is triggered with the 1 state, the coilswitches its make contacts to the 0 state.
onon

Figure 64:

Signal diagram of inverse contactor function

Rising edge evaluation (cycle pulse) È
If the coil is only meant to switch on a rising edge, thisfunction will be applied. With a change in the coil state from0 to 1, the coil switches its make contacts to the 1 state forone cycle.
onon

Figure 65:

Signal diagram of cycle pulse with rising edge

Falling edge evaluation (cycle pulse) è
If the coil is only meant to switch on a falling edge, thisfunction will be applied. With a change in the coil state from
1 to 0, the coil switches its make contacts to the 1 state forone cycle.

121

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

onon

Figure 66:

h122

Signal diagram of cycle pulse with falling edge

A set coil is automatically switched off if the power fails
and if easy is in STOP mode. Exception: Retentive coils
retain signal 1 (see a Section “Retention”, Page 283).

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Function blocks

The function blocks are used to simulate some of the devices
used in conventional open-loop and closed-loop control
systems. easy800 provides the following function blocks:• Analog value comparator/threshold controller (onlywith easy800 V DC variants)• Arithmetic,– addition, subtraction, multiplication, division• Compare data blocks• Transfer data blocks• Boolean sequence• Counters,– up and down counters with upper and lower thresholdvalues, preset– frequency counters,– high-speed counters,– Incremental encoder counter• Comparators• Text, output freely editable texts, enter values• Data function block• PID controllers• Smoothing filters• Value scaling• Pulse width modulator• Read (GET) data from the easy-NET• Time switches,– weekday/time– year, month, day (date),• Numerical converters• Master reset• Operating hours counter• Write (PUT) data to the easy-NET• Synchronisation of date and time via the easy-NET123

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800• Timing relays– on-delayed,– on-delayed with random switching,– Off-delayed, also retriggerable– Off-delayed with random switching, also retriggerable– on and off delayed,– on and off delayed with random switching,– single pulse,– synchronous flashing,– asynchronous flashing,• Set cycle time
• Value limitation
The following applies to function blocks:h

The most recent actual values are cleared if the power
supply is switched off or if easy800 is switched to STOP
mode. Exception: Retentive data keeps its state(a Section “Retention”, Page 283).
The most recent actual values are transferred to theoperands every cycle. The data function block is an
exception.

124hAttention!
The following applies to RUN mode: easy800 processes
the function block after a pass through the circuit diagram.
The last state of the coils is used for this.

h

If you want to prevent other people from modifying theparameters, change the access enable symbol from “+” to“–” when creating the circuit diagram and setting
parameters and protect the circuit diagram with apassword.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blockshAttention!
The function blocks are designed so that a function block
output can be assigned directly to the input of anotherfunction block. This enables you always to have an
overview which value is transferred.
If different data formats are used, such as if the firstfunction block uses 32 bits and an 8-bit or 16-bit format isused for further processing, sign value errors or valueerrors may occur when transferring from one function
block to another one.

Analog value comparator/threshold value switch
easy800 provides 32 analog value comparators from A 01 to
A 32.
With an analog value comparator or threshold value switch
you can, for example, compare analog input values with asetpoint value.
All easy800 DC variants have analog inputs.
The following comparisons are possible:• Function block input >I1 greater than or equal to,equal to, less than or equal to function block input>I2• Using the factors >F1 and >F2 as inputs enables you toamplify and adjust the values of the function block inputs.
• The >OS function block input can be used as an offset for
the >I1 input.
• The >HY function block input is used for the positive andnegative switching hysteresis of the input >I2. The
contact switches in accordance with the comparison modeof the function block.

125

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

I 01----A 01Q1-----------------Ä Q 01
I 02--u-A 02Q1-----------------S Q 02
h-A 03Q1-----------------R Q 03

Figure 67:

A 02 GT
>I1
>F1
>I2

>F2
>OS
>HY

+

easy800 circuit diagram with analog value
comparators

Parameter display and parameter set for analog value
comparators:
A 02

Analog value comparator function block number 02

GT

Greater than mode+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Comparison value 1>F1

Amplification factor for >I1 (>I1 = >F1 x value)>I2

Comparison value 2>F2

Amplification factor for >I2 (>I2 = >F2 x value)

>OS
>HY

Offset for the value of >I1
Switching hysteresis for value >I2 (Value HY applies topositive and negative hysteresis.)

Inputs
The function block inputs >I1, >F1, >I2, >F2, >OS and>HY can have the following operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block126

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Analog value comparator operating modes
Parameter

FunctionGT>I1 greater than >I2

EQ>I1 equal to >I2LT>I1 less than >I2

Contacts
A 01Q1 to A 32Q1
Memory requirement of the analog value comparator
The analog value comparator function block requires
68 bytes of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on thefunction block inputs.

1

3
2 3
1

6
1
5

4
A

B

Figure 68:

C

Signal diagram of analog value comparator

1: actual value on >I1
2: setpoint value on >I2
3: hysteresis on >HY
4: switching contact (make contact)
5: offset for value >I1

127

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

6: actual value plus offset• Range A: Compare >I1 > >I2– The actual value >I1 increases.
– The contact switches when the actual reaches the setpointvalue.
– The actual value changes and falls below the value of the
setpoint value minus the hysteresis.
– The contact goes to the normal position.
• Range B: Compare >I1 < >I2– The actual value drops.
– The contact switches if the actual reaches the setpoint value.
– The actual value changes and rises above the value of the
setpoint value plus hysteresis.
– The contact goes to the normal position.
• Range C: Compare >I1 > >I2 with offset– This example behaves as described in Range A. The offset
value is added to the actual value.
• Comparison >I1 = >I2
The contact switches on:– If the setpoint is exceeded with the actual value rising.
– If the setpoint is undershot with the actual value decreasing.
The contact switches off:
– If the hysteresis limit is exceeded with the actual value rising.
– If the hysteresis limit is undershot with the actual value
decreasing.

Arithmetic function blockeasy800 provides 32 arithmetic function blocks AR01 to
AR32.
The arithmetic function block is used for arithmetic
operations. All four basic arithmetic operations aresupported:• add,• subtract,• multiply,• divide.

128

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Inputs
The function block inputs >I1 and >I2 can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Actual value …QV>The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
An arithmetic function block is not wired in the circuit
diagram.
AR32 ADD
>I1
>I2

QV>

+

Parameter display and parameter set for arithmetic function
blocks:
AR32

Arithmetic function block number 32

ADD

Addition mode+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

First value>I2

Second value

QV>

Result of the addition

Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of
a function block.

129

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Arithmetic function block modes
Parameter

Function

ADD

Addition of summand value >I1 plus summand >I2

SUB

Subtraction of minuend >I1 minus subtrahend >I2

MULMultiplication of factor >I1 by factor >I2

DIVDivision of dividend >I1 by divisor >I2

Value range
The function block operates in the integer range from–2147483648 to +2147483647.
Behaviour when value range is exceeded• The function block sets the switching contact AR..CY tostatus 1.
• The function block retains the value of the last valid
operation. The value is zero when it is first called.
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Contacts
AR01CY to AR32CY: CARRY overflow bit, value on function
block output greater than or less than the value range.
AR01ZE to AR32ZE: ZERO zero bit, value on function block
output is equal to zero.
Coils
The arithmetic function block does not have any coils.
Memory requirement of the arithmetic function block
The arithmetic function block requires 40 bytes of memory
plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs.

13008/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Addition
42 + 1000 = 1042
2147483647 + 1 = last valid value of this arithmetic
operation, due to overflow (CARRY)
AR..CY = Status 1–2048 +1000 = –1048
Subtraction
1134 – 42 =1092–2147483648 – 3 = last valid value of this arithmetic
operation, due to overflow (CARRY)
AR..CY = Status 1–4096 – 1000 = –5096–4096 – (–1000) = –3096
Multiplication
12 x 12 = 144
1000042 x 2401 = last valid value of this arithmetic
operation, due to overflow (CARRY)
Correct value = 2401100842
AR..CY = Status 1–1000 x 10 = –10000
Division
1024: 256 = 41024: 35 = 29 (The digits after the decimal point areomitted.)1024: 0 = last valid value of this arithmetic operation, due
to overflow (CARRY)(mathematically correct: “Infinite”)
AR..CY = Status 1–1000: 10 = –100
1000: –10 = –100
–1000: (–10) = 100
10: 100 = 0131

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Data block comparator
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy800 provides 32 function blocks BC01 to BC32 forcomparing values of two consistent marker ranges. The
comparison is in byte format. The following marker types canbe compared:
• MB,
• MW,
• MD.

The function block is enabled in the circuit diagram.
I 05--------------------------Ä BC27EN
BC27E1o
BC27E2s
BC27E3j-----------------------Ä M 48
BC27EQ-BC27EN-----------------Ä M 49

Figure 69:

BC27
>I1
>I2
>NO

+

easy800 circuit diagram with enabling of data blockcomparator function block

Parameter display and parameter set for a data blockcomparator:
BC27

Data block comparator function block number 27+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Start of comparison range 1>I2

Start of comparison range 2>NO

Number of elements to be compared in bytes per range.
Value range 1 to + 383

Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of
a function block.
According to the operands at the inputs >I1 and >I2 thefollowing operating modes are possible:13208/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Inputs
The function block inputs >I1, >I2 and >NO can havethe following operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function blockSpecifying the marker range without offset
If MB, MW or MD markers are specified at both >I1 and>I2 the number of the markers is the start of comparison
range 1 or 2.
Specifying the marker range with offset
If you wish to work with an offset, specify one of thefollowing variables at function block input >I1 or >I2:
• Constant,• Actual value ..QV of a function block,• Analog input IA..,• Analog output QA..
The value at the input is taken as the offset to marker MB01.
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• –: Access disabled
Contacts
BC01E1 to BC32E1: the number of comparison elements
exceeds one of the comparison ranges.
BC01E2 to BC32E2: The number of comparison elements
exceeds one of the comparison ranges.
13308/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

BC01E3 to BC32E3: the number of comparison elements
exceeds one of the comparison ranges.
BC01EQ to BC32EQ: output of the comparison result. Only
valid if the BC..EN enable has been triggered. Status 0 =Comparison ranges not equal,
Status 1 = Comparison ranges equal
Coils
BC01EN to BC32EN: Enable coil of the data blockcomparator function block.
Memory requirement of the data block comparator
function block
The data block comparator function block requires 48 bytes
of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
inputs.
Function of the data block comparator function block
The data block comparator function block compares two
consistent data blocks.
The comparison is active if the BC..EN (enable) is triggered.

h

No data blocks are compared if an error is present.
The error outputs E1, E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless ofthe status of the enable.
Example:Comparison of marker blocks, definition of marker ranges
directTwo marker blocks are to be compared. Block 1 starts at
MB10, Block 2 at MB40. Each block is 10 bytes long.
Parameters of BC01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MB10
Comparison range 2:>I2 MB40
Number of bytes: >NO
10134

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Comparison
range 1

Value ofmarker range 1(decimal)Comparison
range 2

Value ofmarker range 2(decimal)

MB10

39

MB40

39

MB11

56

MB41

56

MB12

88

MB42

88

MB13

57

MB43

57

MB14

123

MB44

123

MB15

55

MB45

55

MB16

134

MB46

134

MB17

49

MB47

49

MB18

194

MB48

194

MB19

213

MB49

213

The comparison result of the function block BC01 is:
BC01EQ = 1, the data block ranges have the same content.
Example:Comparison of marker blocks, definition of a marker range
with offset
Two marker blocks are to be compared. Block 1 starts at
MB105, Block 2 at MB65. Each block is 4 bytes long.
Parameters of BC01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MB15
Comparison range 2:>I2
64
Number of bytes: >NO
4
Marker MB01:
1hComparison range 2: Constant 64:
MB01 plus Offset: 1 + 64 = 65 r MB65.

135

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Comparison
range 1

Value ofmarker range 1(decimal)Comparison
range 2

Value ofmarker range 2(decimal)

MB15

45

MB65

45

MB16

62

MB66

62

MB17

102

MB67

102

MB18

65

MB68

57

The comparison result of the function block BC01 is:
BC01EQ = 0, the data block ranges do not have the samecontent.
MB18 are MB68 not identical.
Example:Comparison of marker blocks, definition of a marker range
in a different format.
Two marker blocks are to be compared. Block 1 starts at
MB60, Block 2 at MB80. Each block is 6 bytes long.
Parameters of BC01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MB60
Comparison range 2:>I2 MD80
Number of bytes: >NO
6

h

136

The comparison is in byte format. MD80 has 4 bytes.
Therefore the first two bytes of MD81 are also compared.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Comparison
range 1

Value ofmarker range 1(decimal/binary)Comparison
range 2

Value of marker range 2 (decimal/
binary)MB60

45/00101101

MD80 (Byte 1, LSB)

1097219629/
0100000101100110001111100010
1101

MB61

62/
00111110

MD80 (Byte 2)1097219629/
0100000101100110001111100010
1101

MB62

102/
01100110

MD80 (Byte 3)1097219629/
0100000101100110001111100010
1101

MB63

65/
01000001

MD80(Byte 4, MSB)

1097219629/
0100000101100110001111100010
1101

MB64

173/
10101101

MD81(Byte 1, LSB)

15277/
0011101110101101

MB65

59/
00111011

MD81 (Byte 2)

15277/
0000100010101101

The comparison result of the function block BC01 is:
BC01EQ = 0, the data block ranges do not have the samecontent.
MB65 and MD81 (Byte 2) are not identical.
Example:Comparison of marker blocks, range violation error.
Two marker blocks are to be compared. Block 1 starts at
MB60, Block 2 at MB90. Each block is 30 bytes long.
Parameters of BC01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MD60
Comparison range 2:>I2 MD90
Number of bytes: >NO30

hThe comparison is in byte format. MD90 to MD96 is 28
bytes. The number of bytes is 30 bytes.
137

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

The error message “Number of comparison elements
exceeds one of the comparison ranges” is output.
BC01E1 is 1.
ExampleComparison of marker blocks, range overlap error.
Two marker blocks are to be compared. Block 1 starts at
MW60, Block 2 at MW64. Each block is 12 bytes long.
Parameters of BC01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MW60
Comparison range 2:>I2 MW64
Number of bytes: >NO12h

The comparison is in byte format. MW60 to MW64 is 8
bytes. The number of bytes is 12 bytes.
The error message “Comparison ranges overlap” is output.
BC01E2 is 1.
Example:Comparison of marker blocks, invalid offset error.
Two marker blocks are to be compared. Block 1 starts at
MW40, Block 2 at MW54. The block length is specified by
the value of the counter C 01QV.
Parameters of BC01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MW40
Comparison range 2:>I2 MW54
Number of bytes: >NO C 01QVh

The value of C 01QV is 1024. This value is too big. The
value at >NO can be between 1 and +383.
The message "The specified offset of the comparison ranges
is outside of the permissible range" is output.
BC01E3 is 1.

138

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Data block transfer
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy800 is provided with 32 function blocks BT01 to BT32
for transferring values from one marker range (Copy data).
The marker ranges can be overwritten with a particular value(data initialisation). The following marker types can betransferred and overwritten:
• MB,
• MW,
• MD.
The function block is enabled in the circuit diagram.
I 05--------------------------Ä BT07T_
BT07E1o
BT07E2s
BT07E3j-----------------------Ä M 42

Figure 70:

BT07 INI
>I1
>I2
>NO

+

easy800 circuit diagram with enabling of transfer data
block function block

Parameter display and parameter set for a transfer data
block function:
BT07

Data block transfer function block number 07

INI

INI mode, initialise marker ranges+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Source range start>I2

Destination range start>NO

Number of elements to be written in bytes per range.
Value range 1 to + 383

Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of
a function block.

139

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Operating modes of the transfer data block function
block
Parameter

Function

INI

Initialise marker ranges

CPY

Copy marker ranges

Inputs
The function block inputs >I1, >I2 and >NO can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function blockSpecifying the marker range without offset
If MB, MW or MD markers are specified both at >I1 and at>I2, the number of markers defines the source ordestination range.
Specifying a marker range with offset
If you wish to work with an offset, specify one of thefollowing variables at function block input >I1 or >I2• Constant,• Actual value ..QV of a function block,• Analog input IA..,• Analog output QA..
The value at the input is taken as the offset to marker MB01.
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• –: Access disabled14008/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Contacts
BT01E1 to BT32E1: the number of marker bytes exceeds thesource or destination range.
BT01E2 to BT32E2: source and destination range overlap.
Only valid for CPY mode, copy marker ranges.
BT01E3 to BT32E3: the specified offset is invalid.
Coils
BT01T_ to BT32T_: trigger coil of the transfer data block
function block.
Memory requirement of the transfer data block
function block
The transfer data block function block requires 48 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per constant at the function block
inputs.
Function of the transfer data block function block
The transfer data block comparator function block has two
operating modes.

hNo data blocks are initialised if an error occurs.
Initalising INI marker ranges
There is one source range and one destination range. The
source range is specified at >I1. The length of the source
range is one byte. The destination range is specified at >I2.
The length of the destination range is specified by the
number of bytes at the >NO input.
The content of the source range is transferred to the marker
bytes in the destination range.
The function block executes the transfer if there is a risingedge from 0 to 1 at the BT..T_ (Trigger) coil.
The error outputs E1, E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless ofthe status of the trigger.

141

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Example:Initialising marker blocks, specifying marker ranges directly
The value of marker byte 10 is to be transferred to marker
bytes 20 to 29.
Parameters of BT01 function block:Source range:>I1 MB10
Destination range:>I2 MB20
Number of bytes:>NO
10
Source range

Value ofsource marker
range(decimal)Destination
range

Value ofdestination
marker range(decimal)

MB10

123

MB20

123

MB21

123

MB22

123

MB23

123

MB24

123

MB25

123

MB26

123

MB27

123

MB28

123

MB29

123

After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BT01T_ the value 123
is present in the marker bytes MB20 to MB29.
Example:Initialisation of marker blocks, definition of a range withoffset
The content of marker byte MB15 is to be transferred tomarker bytes MB65 to MB68.

142

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Parameters of BT01 function block:Source range:>I1 MB15
Destination range: >I2
64
Number of bytes: >NO
4
Marker MB01:
1hDestination range: Constant 64:
Marker MB01 plus Offset: 1 + 64 = 65 r MB65.

Source range

Value ofsource marker
range(decimal)Destination
range

Value ofdestination
marker range(decimal)

MB15

45

MB65

45

MB66

45

MB67

45

MB68

45

After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BT01T_ the value 45 ispresent in the marker bytes MB65 to MB68.
Example:Initialisation of marker blocks, definition of a range in adifferent format.
The value of marker byte MB60 is to be transferred to MD80
and MD81.
Parameters of BT01 function block:Source range:>I1 MB60
Destination range: >I2 MD80
Number of bytes: >NO8h

The transfer is in byte format. MD80 has 4 bytes andMD81 has 4 bytes, which means that <NO has the value 8.

143

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Comparison
range 1

Value ofmarkerrange 1(decimal/binary)Comparison
range 2

Value of marker range 2 (decimal/binary)

MB60

45/
00101101

MD80(Byte 1, LSB)

757935405/
00101101001011010010110100101101

MD80 (Byte 2)757935405/
00101101001011010010110100101101

MD80 (Byte 3)757935405/
00101101001011010010110100101101

MD80(Byte 4, MSB)

757935405/
00101101001011010010110100101101

MD81(Byte 1, LSB)

757935405/
00101101001011010010110100101101

MD81 (Byte 2)757935405/
00101101001011010010110100101101

MD81 (Byte 3)757935405/
00101100010110110010110100101101

MD81(Byte 4, MSB)

757935405/
00101101001011010010110100101101

After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BT01T_ the value
757935405 is present in the marker double words MD80
and MD81.
Example:Transfer of marker byte, range violation error.
The value of marker byte MB96 is to be transferred to MD93,
MD94, MD95 and MD96. The length is 16 bytes.
Parameters of BT01 function block:Source range:>I1 MD96
Destination range: >I2 MD93
Number of bytes: >NO
18

h
144

The transfer is in byte format. MD93 to MD96 is 16 bytes.
18 bytes were incorrectly defined as length.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

The error message “Number of elements exceeds thedestination range” is output.
BT01E1 is 1.
Example:Transfer of marker bytes, invalid offset error.
The value of marker byte MB40 is to be transferred to MW54
and subsequent marker words. The block length is specified
by the value of the counter C 01QV.
Parameters of BC01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MB40
Comparison range 2:>I2 MW54
Number of bytes: >NO C 01QVh

The value of C 01QV is 788. This value is too big. The value
at >NO can be between 1 and +383.
The message "The specified offset of the destination range
is outside of the permissible range" is output.
BT01E3 is 1.
CPY mode, copy marker ranges
There is one source range and one destination range. The
source range is specified at >I1. The destination range is
specified at >I2. The length of the source and destination
range is specified by the number of bytes at the >NO input.
The content of the source range is copied to the marker bytes
in the destination range.
The function block executes the copy operation if there is arising edge from 0 to 1 at the BT..T_ (Trigger) coil.
The error outputs E1, E2 and E3 are evaluated regardless ofthe status of the trigger.

145

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Example:Copy of marker blocks, definition of marker ranges direct
The content of marker bytes 10 to 19 is to be transferred tomarker bytes 20 to 29.
Parameters of BT01 function block:Source range:>I1 MB10
Destination range:>I2 MB20
Number of bytes: >NO
10
Source range

Value ofsource marker
range(decimal)Destination
range

Value ofdestination
marker range(decimal)

MB10

42

MB20

42

MB11

27

MB21

27

MB12

179

MB22

179

MB13

205

MB23

205

MB14

253

MB24

253

MB15

17

MB25

17

MB16

4

MB26

4

MB17

47

MB27

47

MB18

11

MB28

11

MB19

193

MB29

193

After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BT01T_ the content of
MB10 to MB19 is copied to the marker bytes MB20 to
MB29.
Example:Copying of marker blocks, definition of a marker range withoffset
The content of marker byte MB15 to MB18 is to be copied tomarker bytes MB65 to MB68.

146

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Parameters of BT01 function block:Source range:>I1 MB15
Destination range: >I2
64
Number of bytes: >NO
4
Marker MB01: 1

hDestination range: Constant 64:
Marker MB01 plus Offset: 1 + 64 = 65 r MB65.

Source range

Value ofsource marker
range(decimal)Destination
range

Value ofdestination
marker range(decimal)

MB15

68

MB65

68

MB16

189

MB66

189

MB17

203

MB67

203

MB18

3

MB68

3

After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BT01T_ the content of
MB15 to MB18 is copied to the marker bytes MB65 to
MB68.
Example:Copying of marker blocks, definition of a marker range in adifferent format.
The value of marker byte MD60 to MD62 is to be copied toMW40 to MW45.
Parameters of BT01 function block:Source range:>I1 MD60
Destination range: >I2 MW40
Number of bytes: >NO12h

The transfer is in byte format. 12 bytes are to be copied.
The range MD60 to MD62 is 12 bytes. This is copied to therange MW40 to MW45.

147

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Comparison
range 1

Value of marker range 1(decimal/binary)Comparison
range 2

Value of marker range 2(decimal/binary)

MD60866143319/
0011001110100000
0100110001010111

MW40 (LSW)

19543/
0011001110100000
0100110001010111

MD60

866143319/
0011001110100000
0100110001010111

MW41 (MSW)13216/
0011001110100000
0100110001010111

MD61

173304101/
0000101001010100
0110100100100101

MW42 (LSW)

26917/
0000101001010100
0110100100100101

MD61

173304101/
0000101001010100
0110100100100101

MB43 (MSW)

2644/
0000101001010100
0110100100100101

MD62

982644150/
0011101010010001
1111010110110110

MB44 (LSW)62902/
0011101010010001
1111010110110110

MD62

982644150/
0011101010010001
1111010110110110

MB45 (MSW)

14993/
0011101010010001
1111010110110110

After a rising edge from 0 to 1 at coil BT01T_ the values arecopied to the appropriate range.
Example:Copying of marker bytes, destination range violation error.
The value of marker bytes MB81 to MB96 is to be transferred
to MD93, MD94, MD95 and MD96. The length is 16 bytes.
Parameters of BT01 function block:Source range:>I1 MB81
Destination range: >I2 MD93
Number of bytes: >NO18

148

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocksh

The transfer is in byte format. MD93 to MD96 is 16 bytes.
18 bytes were incorrectly defined as length.
The error message “Number of elements exceeds thedestination range” is output.
BT01E1 is 1.
ExampleComparison of marker blocks, range overlap error.
12 bytes are to be copied starting from MW60. MW64 is
specified as destination address.
Parameters of BT01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MW60
Comparison range 2:>I2 MW64
Number of bytes: >NO12h

The copy operation is in byte format. MW60 to MW64 is 8
bytes. The number of bytes is 12 bytes.
The error message “Both ranges overlap” is output.
BC01E2 is 1.
Example:Copying of marker bytes, invalid offset error.
The value of marker word MW40 is to be copied to MW54
and subsequent marker words. The block length is specified
by the value of the counter C 01QV.
Parameters of BT01 function block:
Comparison range 1:>I1 MW40
Comparison range 2:>I2 MW54
Number of bytes: >NO C 01QVh

The value of C 01QV is 10042. This value is too big. The
value at >NO can be between 1 and +383.
The message "The specified offset of the destination range
is outside of the permissible range" is output.
BT01E3 is 1.
149

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Boolean operation
easy800 provides 32 function blocks from BV01 to BV32 for
Boolean operations with values.
The following possibilities are provided by the Boolean
sequence function block:• Masking out of special bits from values,• Bit pattern recognition,• Bit pattern modification.
A Boolean sequence function block is not wired in the circuit
diagram.
BV27 AND
>I1
>I2

QV>

+

Parameter display and parameter set for Boolean sequencefunction block:
BV27

Boolean sequence function block number 27

ANDAND operation mode+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

First value>I2

Second value

QV>

Result of the sequence

Only constants can be modified in the parameter display of
a function block.
Operating modes of the Boolean sequence function
block

150

Parameter

FunctionAND

AND operation

OR

OR operation

XOR

Exclusive OR operation

NOT

Negation of the Boolean value of >I1

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Value range
32 bit signed value
Inputs
The function block inputs >I1 and >I2 can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Actual value …QV>The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• –: Access disabled
Contacts
BV01ZE to BV32ZE: ZERO zero bit, value on output function
block is equal to zero
Coils
The Boolean sequence function block does not have coils.
Memory requirement Boolean sequence function
block
The Boolean sequence function block requires 40 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
inputs.
151

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Function of Boolean sequence function block
The function block creates the sequence depending on theoperating mode.

h

If you program a negative value, e.g.: –10dec, the CPU will
form the two's complement of the amount.
Example:–10dec = 10000000000000000000000000001010bin
Two's complement =11111111111111111111111111110110bin =FFFFFFF6hex
Bit 32 is the signed bit and remains as 1.
AND Boolean sequence
Value >I1:

13219dec = 0011001110100011bin

Value >I2:

57193dec = 1101111101101001bin

Result QV>:

4897dec = 0001001100100001bin

OR Boolean sequence
Value >I1:

13219dec = 0011001110100011bin

Value >I2:

57193dec = 1101111101101001bin

Result QV>:

65515dec = 1111111111101011bin

XOR Boolean sequence

152

Value >I1:

13219dec = 0011001110100011bin

Value >I2:

57193dec = 1101111101101001bin

Result QV>:

60618dec = 1110110011001010bin

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

NOT Boolean sequence
Value >I1:
Value >I2:

13219dec =00000000000000000011001110100011bin
OmittedResult QV>: –13220dec =11111111111111111100110001011100bin
The NOT sequence operates according to the following rules:>I1, positive value

Negate value of >I1 and subtract 1:–|>I1| – 1 = >I2>I1, Negative value
Value of >I1 and subtract 1:|>I1| – 1 = >I2

Counters
easy800 provides 32 up/down counters from C 01 to C 32. The
counter relays allow you to count events. You can enter
upper and lower threshold values as comparison values. The
contacts will switch according to the actual value. To specify
a start value, for example, counting from the value 1200,
this can be implemented using a “C ..” counter.
The “C..” counters are cycle time dependent.
Wiring of a counter
You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of acontact and coil. The counter relay has different coils andcontacts.

h

To prevent unpredictable switching states, use each coil ofa relay once only in the circuit diagram.

153

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

I
I
I
I
C
C
C
C

05---------------------------Ä
06---------------------------Ä
07---------------------------Ä
08---------------------------Ä
20OF-------------------------Ä
20FB-------------------------Ä
20ZE-------------------------Ä
20CY-------------------------S

Figure 71:
C 20
>SH

+

>SL
>SV

QV>

C
C
C
C
Q
Q
Q
M

20C_
20RE
20D_
20SE
01
02
03
42

easy800 circuit diagram with counter relay

Parameter display and parameter set for counter
relay:
C 20

Counter relay function block number 20+

Appears in the parameter display>SH

Upper setpoint>SL

Lower setpoint>SV

Defined actual value (Preset)

QV>

Actual value in RUN mode

In the parameter display of a counter relay you change
setpoint values and/or the preset value and enabling of theparameter display.
Value range
The function block operates in the integer range from–2147483648 to 2147483647.
Behaviour when value range is exceeded
The function block sets the switching contact C .. CY to thestatus 1 and retains the value of the last valid operation.

h154

Counter C counts every rising edge on the counter input.
If the value range is exceeded, the switching contact
C ..CY switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge
detected.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Inputs
The function block inputs >SH, >SL and >SV can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Actual value …QV>The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Contacts• C 01OF to C 32OF: Actual value f upper setpoint• C 01FB to C 32FB: Actual value F Lower setpoint value• C 01ZE to C 32ZE: Actual value = zero
• C 01CY to C 32CY: Value range exceededCoils• C 01C_ to C 32C_: counter coils, count with rising edge
• C 01D_ to C 32D_: count direction definition,
status 0 = count upwards, status 1 = count downwards• C 01RE to C 32RE: Reset actual value to zero
• C 01SE to C 32SE: accept defined actual value with rising
edge.
155

Wiring with easy800

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Memory requirement of the counter relay
The counter relay function block requires 52 bytes of memory
plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs.
Retention
Counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values.
The number of retentive counter relays can be selected in the
SYSTEM r RETENTION menu.
The retentive actual value requires 4 bytes of memory.
If a counter relay is retentive, the actual value is retained
when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as
well as when the power supply is switched off.
If easy is started in RUN mode, the counter relay operates
with the retentively saved actual value.

156

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Function of the counter function block.........

1.........

2
3

4

5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12
A

B

C

Figure 72:

D

E

F

Signal diagram of counter1: counter coil C..C_
2: upper setpoint value >SH
3: preset actual value >SV
4: lower setpoint value >SL
5: counting direction, coil C..D_
6: accept preset actual value, coil C..SE157

Wiring with easy800

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

7: reset coil C..RE
8: contact (make contact) C..OF upper setpoint value reached,exceeded
9: contact (make contact) C..FB lower setpoint value reached,undershot
10: actual value equal to zero
11: out of value range• Range A:– The counter has the value zero.
– The contacts C..ZE (actual value equal to zero) and C..FB(lower setpoint value undershot) are active.
– The counter receives counter values and increases the actual
value.
– C..ZE drops out as well as C..FB and also when the lower
setpoint value is reached.
• Range B:– The counter counts upwards and reaches the upper setpointvalue. The contact “upper setpoint value reached” C..OF
becomes active.
• Range C:– The coil C..SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is set tothe preset actual value. The contacts go to the respective
position.
• Range D:– The counting direction coil C..D_ is actuated. If counting
impulses are present, downward count is initiated.
– If the lower setpoint value is undershot, the contact C..FB
becomes active.
• Range E:– The reset coil C..RE is activated. The actual value is set to zero.
– The contact C..ZE is active.
• Range F:– The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter.
– The contacts become active according to the direction of thevalues (positive or negative).

158

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

High-speed counters
easy800 provides various high-speed counter functions.
These counter function blocks are coupled directly to thedigital inputs. The high-speed counter functions are only
available with EASY8..-DC...
The following functions are possible:• Frequency counters, measure frequencies CF..
• High-speed counters, count high-speed signals CH..
• Incremental encoder counters, count two-channel
incremental encoder signals CI..
The high-speed digital inputs are I1 to I4.
The following wiring rules apply:• I1: CF01 or CH01 or CI01
• I2: CF02 or CH02 or CI01
• I3: CF03 or CH03 or CI02
• I4: CF04 or CH04 or CI02
Attention!
Every digital input I .. may only be used once by the CF,
CH, CI function blocks.
The incremental encoder occupies an input pair.
Example:• I1: high-speed counter CH01
• I2: frequency counter CF02
• I3: incremental encoder channel A CI02
• I4: incremental encoder channel B CI02159

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Example: function block list in the FUNCTION RELAYS menu:
CI01
CF01
CH01

All function blocks access digital input I1.
Only CH01 supplies the correct value.

Frequency countereasy800 provides four frequency counters which are CF01 to
CF04. The frequency counters enable the measurement of
frequencies. You can enter upper and lower threshold values
as comparison values. The high-speed frequency counters
are hardwired to the digital inputs I1 to I4.
The CF.. frequency counters operate independently of thecycle time.
Counter frequency and pulse shape
The maximum counter frequency is 5 kHz.
The minimum counter frequency is 4 Hz.
The signals must be square waves. The mark-to-space ratio
is 1:1.
Measurement method
The pulses on the input are counted for one second
irrespective of the cycle time, and the frequency isdetermined. The result of the measurement is madeavailable as a value to the function block output CF..QV.
Wiring of a counter
The following assignment of the digital inputs apply.
• I1 counter input for the counter CF01
• I2 counter input for the counter CF02
• I3 counter input for the counter CF03
• I4 counter input for the counter CF04160

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocksh

To prevent unpredictable switching states, use each coil ofa relay once only in the circuit diagram. Use a counter
input for the CF, CH, CI counters only once.
Wiring of a frequency counter
You integrate a frequency counter into your circuit in theform of a contact and coil. The counter relay has different
coils and contacts.
I 05---------------------------Ä
CF01OF-------------------------Ä
CF01FB-------------------------Ä
CF01ZE-------------------------Ä

Figure 73:
CF01
>SH
>SL

QV>

-

CF01EN
Q 01
Q 02
q 03

easy800 circuit diagram with frequency counter

Parameter display and parameter set for frequency counter:
CF01

Frequency counter function block number 01-

Does not appear in the parameter display>SH

Upper setpoint>SL

Lower setpoint

QV>

Actual value in RUN mode

In the parameter display of a counter relay you change
setpoint values and/or the preset value and the enable of theparameter display.
Value range
The function block operates in the integer range from0 to 5000
1 kHz 1 = 1000
Behaviour when value range is exceeded
The value range cannot be exceeded as the maximum
measured value is less than the value range.
Inputs
The function block inputs >SH and >SL can have thefollowing operands:161

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Actual value …QV>The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Contacts• CF01OF to CF04OF: Actual value f Upper setpoint• CF01FB to CF04FB: Actual value F Lower setpoint• CF01ZE to CF04ZE: Actual value = Zero
Coils
CF01EN to CF04EN: enable of the counter with coilstatus = 1.
Memory requirement of the frequency counter
The frequency counter function block requires 40 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
inputs.
Retention
The frequency counter does not retain actual values, as thefrequency is remeasured continuously.
162

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Function of the frequency counter function block
1
2

3

tg

tg

tg

tg

tg

tg

tg

tg

4
5
6
7

Figure 74:

Signal diagram of frequency counter1: counter input I1 to I4
2: upper setpoint value >SH
3: lower setpoint value >SL
4: enable CF..EN
5: contact (make contact) CF..OF upper setpoint value exceeded
6: contact (make contact) CF..FB lower setpoint value undershot
7: actual value equal to zero CF..ZE
tg: gate time for the frequency measurement163

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800• The first measurements are made after the CF..EN enable signal
has been activated. The value is output after the gate time has
timed out.
• The contacts are set in accordance with the measured frequency.
• If the CF..EN enable signal is removed, the output value is set tozero.

High-speed counters
easy800 provides four high-speed up/down counters CH01 to
CH04 for use. The high-speed frequency counters are
hardwired to the digital inputs I1 to I4. These counter relays
allow you to count events independently of the cycle time.
You can enter upper and lower threshold values ascomparison values. The contacts will switch according to theactual value. To specify a start value, for example, counting
from the value 1989, this can be implemented using the “CH..” value.
The CH.. counters operate independently of the cycle time.
Counter frequency and pulse shape
The maximum counter frequency is 5 kHz.
The signals must be square waves. The mark-to-space ratio
is 1:1.
Wiring of a counter
The following assignment of the digital inputs apply.
• I1 counter input for the counter CH01
• I2 counter input for the counter CH02
• I3 counter input for the counter CH03
• I4 counter input for the counter CH04h

To prevent unpredictable switching states, use each coil ofa relay once only in the circuit diagram. Use a counter
input for the CF, CH, CI counters only once.
You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of acontact and coil. The counter relay has different coils andcontacts.

164

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

I 05---------------------------Ä
I 06---------------------------Ä
I 07---------------------------Ä
I 08---------------------------Ä
CH01OF-------------------------Ä
CH01FB-------------------------Ä
CH01ZE-------------------------Ä
CH01CY-------------------------S

Figure 75:
CH01
>SH

+

>SL
>SV

QV>

CH01EN
CH01RE
CH01D_
CH01SE
Q 01
Q 02
Q 03
M 94

easy800 circuit diagram with high-speed counter

Parameter display and parameter set for high-speed
counters:
CH01

High-speed counter function block number 01+

Appears in the parameter display>SH

Upper setpoint>SL

Lower setpoint>SV

Defined actual value (Preset)

QV>

Actual value in RUN mode

In the parameter display of a counter relay you change
setpoint values and/or the preset value and enable of theparameter display.
Value range
The function block operates in the integer range from–2147483648 to 2147483647.
Behaviour when value range is exceeded• The function block sets the switching contact CH..CY tostatus 1.
• The function block retains the value of the last valid
operation.

hCounter CH counts every rising edge on the counter input.
If the value range is exceeded, the switching contact
CH ..CY switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge
detected.

165

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Inputs
The function block inputs >SH, >SL and >SV can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Actual value ..QV>
The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01h

The actual value is only cleared in RUN mode with aselective reset signal.
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Contacts• CH01OF to CH04OF: Actual value f Upper setpoint• CH01FB to CH04FB: Actual value F Lower setpoint• CH01ZE to CH04ZE: Actual value = Zero
• CH01CY to CH04CY: Value range exceeded16608/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Coils• CH01EN to CH04EN: enable of the counter• CH01D to CH04D: count direction definition,state “0” = count upwards, state “1” = countdownwards• CH01RE to CH04RE: reset actual value to zero
• CH01SE to CH04SE: accept preset actual value with risingedge.
Memory requirement of the high-speed counter
The high-speed counter function block requires 52 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
inputs.
Retention
High-speed counter relays can be operated with retentive
actual values. The number of retentive counter relays can beselected in the SYSTEM r RETENTION menu.
If a counter relay is retentive, the actual value is retained
when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as
well as when the power supply is switched off.
If easy is started in RUN mode, the counter relay operates
with the retentively saved actual value.

167

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Function of the high-speed counter function block.........

1.........

2
3

4

5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12
A

B

C

Figure 76:

D

Signal diagram of high-speed counter1: counter input I1 to I4
2: upper setpoint value >SH
3: preset actual value >SV
4: lower setpoint value >SL
5: enable of the counter CH..EN
6: counting direction, coil CH..D
168

E

F

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

7: accept preset actual value, coil CH..SE
8: reset coil CH..RE
9: contact (make contact) CH..OF upper setpoint value reached,exceeded
10: contact (make contact) CH..FB lower setpoint value reached,undershot
11: contact (make contact) CH..ZE actual value equal to zero
12:out of value range• Range A:– The counter has the value zero.
– The contacts CH..ZE (actual value equal to zero) and CH..FB(lower setpoint value undershot) are active.
– The counter receives counter values and increases the actual
value.
– CH..ZE drops out as well as CH..FB after the lower setpointvalue is reached.
• Range B:– The counter counts upwards and reaches the upper setpointvalue. The contact “upper setpoint value” CH..OF becomes
active.
• Range C:– The coil CH..SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is set
to the preset actual value. The contacts go to the respective
position.
• Range D:– The counting direction coil CH..D is actuated. If counting
impulses are present, downward count is initiated.
– If the lower setpoint value is undershot, the contact CH..FB
becomes active.
• Range E:– The reset coil CH..RE is activated. The actual value is set tozero.
– The contact CH..ZE is active.
• Range F:– The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter.
– The contacts become active according to the direction of thevalues (positive or negative).

169

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

High-speed incremental encoder counters
easy800 provides two high-speed incremental encoder
counters CI01 and CI02. The high-speed counter inputs are
hardwired to the digital inputs I1, I2, I3 and I4. These
counter relays allow you to count events independently of
the cycle time. You can enter upper and lower thresholdvalues as comparison values. The contacts will switch
according to the actual value. You can use a CI.. counter if
you wish to define a start value.
The CI.. counters operate independently of the cycle time.
Counter frequency and pulse shape
The maximum counter frequency is 3 kHz.
The signals must be square waves. The mark-to-space ratio
is 1:1. The signals on channels A and B must lead or lag by
90°. Otherwise the counting direction cannot be
determined.

hDouble the number of pulses are counted as a result of theinternal method of operation of the incremental encoder.
The incremental encoder evaluates the rising and fallingedges. This ensures that the pulse count is not affected byoscillation of a signal edge. If the number of pulses are
required, divide the value by two.
Wiring of a counter
The following assignment of the digital inputs apply:• I1 counter input for the counter CI01 channel A• I2 counter input for the counter CI01 channel B• I3 counter input for the counter CI02 channel A• I4 counter input for the counter CI02 channel B170

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocksh

To prevent unpredictable switching states, use each coil ofa relay once only in the circuit diagram.
Use a counter input for the CF, CH, CI counters only once.
You integrate a counter into your circuit in the form of acontact and coil. The counter relay has different coils andcontacts.
I 05---------------------------Ä
I 06---------------------------Ä
I 08---------------------------Ä
CI01OF-------------------------Ä
CI01FB-------------------------Ä
CI01ZE-------------------------Ä
CI01CY-------------------------S

Figure 77:

CI01
>SH
>SL
>SV

QV>

+

CI01EN
CI01RE
CI01SE
Q 01
Q 02
Q 03
M 94

easy800 circuit diagram with high-speed incremental
encoder counter

Parameter display and parameter set for high-speed
incremental encoder counter:
CI01+

High-speed incremental encoder counter function blocknumber 01
Appears in the parameter display>SH

Upper setpoint>SL

Lower setpoint>SV

Defined actual value (Preset)

QV>

Actual value in RUN mode

In the parameter display of a counter relay you change
setpoint values and/or the preset value and enable of theparameter display.
Value range
The function block operates in the integer range from–2147483648 to 2147483647.
Each pulse is counted twice.
Example: value at CI..QV>= 42000
171

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

The counter has counted 21000 pulses.
Behaviour when value range is exceeded• The function block sets the switching contact CI..CY tostatus 1.
• The function block retains the value of the last valid
operation.

hCounter CI counts every rising edge on the counter input.
If the value range is exceeded, the switching contact CI..CY switches to status 1 for one cycle per rising edge
detected.
Inputs
The function block inputs >SH, >SL and >SV can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Actual value ..QV>
The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01h172

The actual value is only erased in RUN mode with aselective reset signal.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Contacts• CI01OF to CI02OF: Actual valuef Upper setpoint• CI01FB to CI02FB: Actual value F Lower setpoint• CI01ZE to CI02ZE: Actual value = Zero
• CI01CY to CI02CY: Value range exceeded
Coils• CI01EN to CI02EN: Counter enable• CI01RE to CI02RE: Reset actual value to zero
• CI01SE to CI02SE: Accept preset actual value with risingedge.
Memory requirement of the counter relay
The high-speed counter function block requires 52 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
inputs.
Retention
High-speed counter relays can be operated with retentive
actual values. The number of retentive counter relays can beselected in the SYSTEM r RETENTION menu.
If a counter relay is retentive, the actual value is retained
when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as
well as when the power supply is switched off.
If easy is started in RUN mode, the counter relay operates
with the retentively saved actual value.

173

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Function of the high-speed incremental encoder
counter function block
1
2

3
4
5

6

7
8
9
10
11

12
A

B

Figure 78:

C

D

F

Signal diagram of high-speed incremental encoder
counter

1: counter input channel A
2: counter input channel B
3: upper setpoint value >SH
4: preset actual value >SV
5: lower setpoint value >SL
6: counter enable174

E

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

7: accept preset actual value, coil CI..EN
8: reset coil CI..RE
9: contact (make contact) CI..OF upper setpoint value reached,exceeded
10: contact (make contact) CI..FB lower setpoint value reached,undershot
11: contact (make contact) CI..ZE actual value equal to zero
12: contact (make contact) CI..CY value range exceededor undershot• Range A:– The counter counts upwards.
– The value leaves the lower threshold value and reaches theupper value.
• Range B:– The count direction changes to a downward count.
– The contacts switch in accordance with the actual value.
• Range C:– The enable signal is set to 0. The actual value becomes 0.
• Range D:– The rising edge on the accept preset value coil sets the actual
value to the preset value.
• Range E:– The reset pulse sets the actual value to zero.
• Range F:– The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter.
– The contacts become active according to the direction of thevalues (positive or negative).

Comparators
Comparator function blocks allow you to compare constantsand variables with one another.
The following comparisons are possible:
Function block input>I1

Function block input
Greater than

>I2

Equal toLess than175

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

CP32LT-------------------------S
CP32EQ-------------------------S
CP32GT------------------------uRhR

Figure 79:
CP02
>I1
>I2

+

Q
Q
Q
Q

01
02
01
02

easy800 circuit diagram with comparator

Parameter display and parameter set for the comparator
function block:
CP02

Analog value comparator function block number 02+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Comparison value 1>I2

Comparison value 2

Inputs
The function block inputs >I1 and >I2 can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function blockContacts• CP01LT to CP32LT, (less than)Contact (make contact) switches to status 1, if the value on>I1 is less than the value on >I2; >I1 < >I2.
• CP01EQ to CP32EQ, (equal to)
Contact (make contact) switches to status 1, if the value on>I1 is equal to the value on >I2; >I1 = I2.
• CP01GT to CP32GT, (greater than)176

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Contact (make contact) switches to status 1, if the value at>I1 is greater than the value at >I2; >I1 > I2.
Memory requirement of the counter relay
The comparator function block requires 32 bytes of memory
plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block inputs.

Text output function blockeasy800 allows you to display 32 user-defined texts. These
texts can be used to display function block actual values,
marker values (MB, MW, MD). Function block setpoints, andmarker values (MB, MW, MD) that are constants can beentered. The texts can be only edited with EASY-SOFT(-PRO).
M 42---------------------------S D 01EN
D 01Q1-------------------------S Q 02

Figure 80:

easy800 circuit diagram with a text output function
block

Contacts
A contact has been assigned to the text output function
block.
D01Q1 to D32Q1, text function block is active.
Coils
D01EN to D32EN, enable of the text function block
Memory requirement of the text output function
block
The text output function block function block requires
160 bytes of memory. This is irrespective of the text size.
CONTROLSWITCHINGCOMMUNICATION

Display
Up to 16 characters per line and up to 4 lines can bedisplayed.

SIMPLY EASY

177

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Displaying a variable
Actual values of function blocks, markers (MB, MW andMD), as well as analog inputs (scalable) can be displayed.
The display of date and time is also possible.
Entering setpoint values
This function is available from device version 04.
Function block setpoints, and marker values (MB, MW, MD)
that are constants can be modified via the text function
block.
The variables and setpoints can be inserted at any desired
position in the text. The variables and setpoints can be 4, 7
and 11 places long.
Pay attention to the maximum character length of thevariables setpoints. Otherwise, characters will beoverwritten or not displayed.
Scaling
The values of the analog inputs and analog output can bescaled.
Range

Selectable display
range

Example0 to 10 V

0 to 9999

0000 to 0100

0 to 10 V

g 999–025 to 050

0 to 10 V

g 9.9–5.0 to 5.0

Function
Text display function block, D = Display: the text display inthe circuit diagram functions as a normal M marker. If a text
is stored in a marker, this is displayed in the easy display
when the coil is set to 1. To use this function, the easy must
be in RUN mode and the Status display must be activatedbefore the text is displayed.

178

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

D 02 to D 32:
If several texts are present and are triggered, each text is
automatically displayed in succession every 4 s. This
procedure is repeated until• none of the text output function blocks are set to 1.
• STOP mode is selected.
• the easy power supply is switched off.
• the OK or DEL + ALT buttons are used to switch to amenu.
• the text for D01 is displayed.
The following applies to D 01
: D1 is assigned as an alarm text. If D01 is activated, the text
assigned to it will be displayed until• the coil D 01EN is reset to 0.
• STOP mode is selected.
• the easy power supply is switched off.
• the OK or DEL + ALT buttons are used to switch to amenu.
Text entry
Text entry is only possible using EASY–SOFT, from version
V 4.0 upwards.
Character set
All ASCII characters in upper and lower case are permissible.
• ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ• abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
The following special characters are permissible:! „“ # $ % & ` () * + , – ./0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9179

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Counter with actual value

Analog values scaled as
temperature values

D1 as error message on fuse
failureQUANTITYTEMPERATURE

FUSE FAULT!COUNTING!

IN

HOUSE 1

QTY:

0042

OUT

-010 DEG+018 DEG

HEATING

Figure 81:

FAILED!

Text output examples

Entering a setpoint in a display
This function is available from device version 04.
The setpoints of function blocks can be incorporated withina text. This is useful if the PARAMETERS menu is notavailable for making entries.

h

The appropriate text function block must be available inorder to modify a setpoint. The setpoint must be aconstant.

h

The text remains static on the display while the values areentered. The actual values are updated.

ACT T01: 000:000

The example shows the following: The setpoint of timing
relay T01 is to be changed from 12 s to 15 s.

ACT C16:• Line 1: Actual value of timing relay T 01
• Line 2: Setpoint of timing relay T 01, editable

SETP
SET

: 012:000

:

04711

10000

ACT T01: 000:000

X Press the ALT button to move the cursor to the first

ACT C16:

In this operating mode, you can use the cursor buttons ÍÚ
to move between editable constants.

SETP
SET

: 012:000

:

04711

10000

ACT T01: 000:000
SETP:

012:0000ACT C16:

180

04711

editable value.

X Press the OK button to move the cursor to the leastsignificant value of the constant to be modified.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

In this operating mode you use the ÍÚ cursor buttons tochange the value. Use the cursor buttons ú í to move
between places.
Use the OK button to accept the modified value. Use the
ESC button to abort the entry and retain the previous value.
ACT T01: 000:000
SETP

:

04711

10000

ACT T01: 000:000
SETP: 012:000

ACT C16:
SET

mode: Move from constant to constant.

: 015:000

ACT C16:SET

X Press the OK button, the cursor switches to the operating:

The modified value is transferred.
Press the ALT button in order to leave Entry mode. (the ESC
button has the same function here.)

04711

10000

Data function block
The data function block allows you to selectively save avalue. Setpoint values for the function block can be saved inthis manner.
GT01Q1---------------------------Ä DB16T
DB16Q1---------------------------S D 02EN

Figure 82:
DB16
>I1

QV>

+

easy800 circuit diagram with data function block:

Parameter display and parameter set for the data function
block:
DB16

Data block function block number 16+

Appears in the parameter display
>I1

QV>

Input value
Actual value

Inputs
The function block input >I1 can be assigned the following
operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB
181

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Output
The function block output QV> can be assigned with thefollowing operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
Contacts
DB01Q1 to DB32Q1
Contact (make contact) DB..Q1 switches to status 1 if thetrigger signal is set to 1.
Coils
DB01T_ to DB32T_, acceptance of the value at >I1 with arising edge.
Memory requirement of the data function block
The data block function block requires 36 bytes of memory
plus 4 bytes per constant at the function block input.
Retention
Data function blocks can be operated with retentive actual
values. The quantity can be selected in the SYSTEM r
RETENTION menu.

182

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Function of the data function block

1

2

3

Figure 83:

Signal diagram of data function block

1: value on input >I1
2: trigger coil DB..T_
3: value on DB..QV>h

The value at input >I1 is only transferred with a rising
trigger edge to an operand (e.g.: MD42, QA01) on output
QV>. Output QV retains its value until it is overwritten.

PID controller
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy800 provides 32 PID controllers DC01 to DC32. The PID
controllers allow you to implement closed-loop control
functions.
Caution!
A knowledge of closed-loop control is required in order to
use the PID controllers.
The control system must be familiar so that the PID
controller can function correctly.

183

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800hThree separate manipulated variables can be output. One
manipulated variable can be output via an analog output.
Two manipulated variables can be processed via twopulse-width modulated outputs. It is therefore useful torun up to three closed-loop controllers per program
simultaneously. Projects can be structured by selecting thecontroller number.
Example: Project with 3 devices
Program 1: Controller DC 10, 11
Program 2: Controller DC20, 21 and 22
Program 3: Controller DC30
Wiring a PID controller
You integrate a PID controller in your circuit as a contact andcoil.
M 51--------------------------uÄdÄdÄvÄ
M 52---------------------------Ä
DC02LI-------------------------S

Figure 84:
DC02 UNP
>I1
>I2
>KP
>TN
>TV
>TC
>MV

QV>

184

+

DC02EN
DC02EP
DC02EI
DC02ED
DC02SE
M 96

easy800-Circuit diagram with PID controller

Parameter display and parameter set for PID
controller
DC02

PID controller function block number 02

UNP

Unipolar mode+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Setpoint of PID controller>I2

Actual value of PID controller>KP

Proportional gain Kp>TN

Reset time Tn>TV

Rate time Tv

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks>TC

Scan time>MV

Manual manipulated variable

QV>

Manipulated variable

In the parameter display of a PID controller you set theoperating mode, the setpoints and enable the parameter
display.
Operating modes of the PID controller

Z

Parameter

Manipulated variable is output as

UNP

Unipolar 12-bit value 0 to +4095

BIP

Bipolar 13-bit value (signed 12-bit value) –4096 to +4095

Inputs
The function block inputs >I1, >I2, >KP, >TN, >TV, >TC
and >MV can have the following operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Actual value …QV>The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01

185

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Value range for inputs and outputs
Value range>I1

Setpoint of PID controller–32 768 to +32767>I2

Actual value of PID
controller,–32 768 to +32767

Resolution/Unit>KP

Proportional gain Kp

0 to 65535

in -- /%>TN

Reset time Tn

0 to 65535

in 100/ms>TV

Rate time Tv

0 to 65535

in 100/ms>TC

Scan time

0 to 65535

in 100/ms>MV

Manual manipulated variable–4096 to +4095

QV>

Manipulated variable

0 to 4095 (unipolar)–4096 to +4095 (bipolar)

Example:Value at input

Value processed in
the function block.

>KP

Proportional gain Kp

1500

15

>TN

Reset time Tn

250

25 s

>TV

Rate time Tv

200

20 s

>TC

Scan time

500

50 s

>MV

Manual manipulated variable

500

500

Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Contacts
DC01LI to DC32LI, value range of the manipulated variable
exceeded.
Coils• DC01EN to DC32EN: Enable PID controller;• DC01EP to DC32EP: Activate proportional component;• DC01EI to DC32EI: Activate integral component;
186

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks• DC01ED to DC32ED: Activate the differential
component;• DC01SE to DC32SE: Activate the manual manipulated
variable
Memory requirement of the PID controller
The PID controller function block requires 96 bytes of memory
plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input.
Function of the PID controller function block
The PID controller works on the basis of the PID algorithm.
According to this, the manipulated variable Y(t) is the resultof the calculation of the proportional component, an integral
component and a differential component.

h

The PID controller must be enabled so that it can work.
Coil DC..EN is active. If coil DC..EN is not active, the entire
PID controller is deactivated and reset. The manipulated
variable is set to zero.
The corresponding coils for the P, I and D components
must be active.
Example: If only coils DC..EP and DC..EI are activated, thecontroller operates as a PI controller.

h

The device calculates the manipulated variable every time
the scan time Tc has elapsed. If the scan time is zero, themanipulated variable is calculated every cycle.
Equation of PID controller:
Y(t) = YP(t) + YI(t) + YD(t)Y(t) = calculated manipulated variable with scan time t
YP(t) = Value of the proportional component of the manipulated
variable with scan time t
YI(t) = Value of the integral component of the manipulated
variable with scan time t
YD(t) = Value of the differential component of the manipulated
variable with scan time t187

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

The proportional component in the PID controller
The proportional component YP is the product of the gain(Kp) and the control difference (e). The control difference isthe difference between the setpoint (Xs) and the actual
value (Xi) at a specified scan time. The equation used by thedevice for the proportional component is as follows:
YP(t) = Kp x [Xs(t) – Xi(t)]Kp = Proportional gain
Xs(t) = Setpoint with scan timet
Xi(t) = Actual value with scan time t

The integral component in the PID controller
The integral component YI is proportional to the sum of thecontrol difference over time. The equation used by the device
for the integral component is as follows:
YI(t) = Kp x Tc/Tn x [Xs(t) – Xi(t)] + YI (t–1)
Kp= Proportional gain
Tc
= Scan time
= Integration time (also known as reset time)Tn
Xs(t) = Setpoint with scan timet
Xi(t) = Actual value with scan time t
YI(t–1) = Value of the integral component of the manipulated
variable with scan timet –1

The differential component in the PID controller
The differential component YD is proportional to the change
in the control difference. So as to avoid step changes or
jumps in the manipulated variable caused by the differential
behaviour when the setpoint is changed, the change of theactual value (the process variable) is calculated and not thechange in the control difference. This is shown in thefollowing equation:
YD(t) = Kp x Tv/Tc x (Xi (t–1) – Xi(t) )Kp = Proportional gain
Tc = Scan time
Tv = Differential time of the control system (also called the rate time)
Xi(t) = Actual value with scan time tXi(t–1) = Actual value with scan time t – 1
188

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Scan time Tc
Scan time Tc determines the duration of the interval in which
the function block is called by the operating system forprocessing. The value range is between 0 and 6553.5 s.
If the value 0 is set, the cycle time of the device is the pause
time between the function block calls.

h

The device cycle time varies according to the length of the
program. With a scan time of 0 s , this may cause anirregular control response.

h

Use the Set cycle time function block (a page 226) inorder to keep the cycle time of the device constant.
Manual mode of the PID controller
A value must be present at the >MV input in order to set the
manipulated variable directly. If the coil DC..SE is activated,the value at >MV is transferred as manipulated variable
QV>. This value is present for as long as the DC..SE coil isactivated or the value at the >MV input is changed. If coil
DC..SE is deactivated, the control algorithm is reactivated.

hExtreme changes in the manipulated variable can occur
when the manual manipulated variable is transferred ordeactivated.

h

If the function block is running in UNI (unipolar) mode, anegative signed manipulated variable value will be
output.

Signal smoothing filter
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy provides 32 signal smoothing filters FT01 to FT32. The
function block allows you to smooth noisy input signals.

18908/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Wiring a signal smoothing filter
You can integrate a signal smoothing filter into your circuit
as a coil.
M 48----------------------------Ä FT17EN

Figure 85:

FT17
>I1

+

>TG
>KP

QV>

h

easy800 circuit diagram with smoothing function
block

Parameter display and parameter set for the FT
function block:
FT17

FT PT1 signal smoothing filter function block, number 17+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Input value>TG

Recovery time

>KP

Proportional gain

QV>

Output value, smoothed

The recovery time Tg is the time in which the output value
is calculated.
The recovery time Tg must be set so that it is an integer
multiple of the cycle time or controller scan time Tc.
Inputs
The function block inputs >I1, >I2 and >KP can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block190

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Output
The function block output QV> can be assigned thefollowing operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
Value range for inputs and outputs
Value range>I1

Resolution/Unit

Input value of the functionblock–32 768 to +32767>TG

Recovery time Tg

0 to 65535

in 100/ms>KP

Proportional gain Kp

0 to 65535

in -- /%

QV>

Output value–32 768 to +32767

Example:Value at input

Value processed in
the function block.

>TG

Recovery time Tg

250

25 s

>KP

Proportional gain Kp

1500

15

Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Coil
FT01EN to FT32EN, function block enable
Memory requirement of the FT function block
The FT function block requires 56 bytes of memory plus
4 bytes per constant on the function block input.

191

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Function of the signal smoothing filter function blockh

The signal smoothing filter must be enabled so that it canwork. Coil FT..EN is active. If coil FT..EN is not active, theentire function block is deactivated and reset. The output
value is set to zero.
If the function block is called for the first time, the output
value is initialised with the input value when the device isstarted or after a reset. This speeds up the startup behaviourof the function block.

h

The function block updates the output value every time
recovery time Tg expires.
The function block operates according to the following
equation:Y(t) = [Ta/Tg] x [Kp x x(t) – Y(t–1)]
Y(t) = Calculated output value for scan time t= Scan timeTa
Tg
= Recovery time
= Proportional gain
Kp
x(t)= Actual value with scan time tY(t–1) = Output value with scan time t – 1

Scan time:
Scan time Ta depends on the set recovery time value.
Recovery time Tg

Scan time Ta

0.1 s to 1 s

10 ms

1 s to 6553 s

Tg x 0.01

GET, fetch a value from the network
The function block allows you to selectively read (get) a
32 bit value from the network. The GET function block
fetches data which another station has made available on
the easy-NET network with a PUT function block.
192

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

GT01Q1---------------------------Ä DB16T

Figure 86:
GT01 02 20
QV>+

easy800 circuit diagram with GET function block

Parameter display and parameter set for the GET function
block:
GT01
02
20

GET function block (fetch a value from the network),
number 01
Station number from which the value is sent. Possible
station number: 01 to 08
Send function block (PT 20) of the sending station.
Possible function block number: 01 to 32+

Appears in the parameter display

QV>

Actual value from the network

Output
The function block output QV> can be assigned thefollowing operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
Contacts
GT01Q1 to GT32Q1
Contact (make contact) GT..Q1 switches to status 1, if a newvalue transferred on the easy-NET network is present.
Memory requirement of the GET function block
The GET function block requires 28 bytes of memory.
GET diagnostics
The GET function block only functions when the easy-NET
network is functioning correctly (a Section “Signs of life of
the individual stations and diagnostics”, Page 259).

193

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Function of the GET function block

1

2

Figure 87:

Signal diagram of GET function block

1: GT..Q1
2: value on GT..QV>h

The GET function blocks are assigned the value 0 when the
power supply is switched on.

Seven-day time switch
easy800 is equipped with a real-time clock which you canuse in the circuit diagram as a 7-day time switch and a year
time switch.

h194

The procedure for setting the time is described under
Section “Setting date, time and daylight saving time” on
Page 273.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Caution!
The 7-day time switch of easy800 devices of device version
03 or lower have the following characteristics.
Requirement:• The function block was entered directly on the easy800.
• At least one channel was not assigned parameters.
• The on time is to be set from 23:59 on Saturday to
Sunday after 00:00.
Behaviour:• The time switch switches off on Sunday at 00:00.
• This cannot be the required off time!
Solution:• Assign all time switch channels with the required on andoff times.
• Use the program EASY-SOFT (-PRO) or
EASY-SOFT (-PRO) for making the entry.
In this case, this behaviour does not occur.
easy provides 32 seven-day time switches HW01 to HW32
for a total of 128 switching times.
Each time switch has four channels which you can use to set
four on and off times. The channels are set via the parameter
display.
The time is backed up in the event of a power failure andcontinues to run, although the time switch relays will nolonger switch. The contacts are kept open when deenergized. Refer to Chapter “Technical data”, Page 317 for
information on the buffer time.

195

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Wiring of a 7-day time switch
A 7-day time switch is integrated into the circuit diagram asa contact.
HW14Q1---------------------------Ä Q 01

Figure 88:
HW14

>DY1
>DY2
>ON

>OFF

A

+

easy800 circuit diagram with 7-day time switch

Parameter display and parameter set for the 7-day timeswitch HW:
HW14

7-day time switch function block number 14

ATime switch channel A+

Appears in the parameter display

>DY1

Day 1

>DY2

Day 2

>ON

On timeF>OF

Off time

Channels
4 channels are available per time switch, channels A, B, C
and D. These channels all act on the contact of the 7-daytime switch.
Day 1 and day 2
Either the time period acts from day 1 to day 2, e.g. Monday
to Friday, or for one day only.
Monday = MO, Tuesday = TU, Wednesday = WE, Thursday= TH, Friday = FR, Saturday = SA, Sunday = SU,Time
00:00 to 23:59
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled196

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Contacts
HW01Q1 to HW32Q1
Memory requirement of the 7-day time switch
The 7-day time switch function block requires 68 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per channel used.
Function of the 7-day time switch
The switching points are defined according to theparameters entered.
MO to FR: on the weekdays Mo, Tu, We, Th, Fr
ON 10:00, OFF 18:00: on and off switching times for theindividual days of the week.
MO: every Monday
ON 10:00: switch on time
SA: every Saturday
OFF 18:00: switch off time
Switching on working days
Time switch HW01 switches on Monday to Friday between
6:30 and 9:30 and between 17:00 and 22:30.
HW01 A>DY1 MO>DY2 FR>ON

06:30>OFF 09:30+

HW01 B>DY1 MO+>DY2 FR>ON

17:00>OFF 22:30

197

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Switching at the weekend
Time switch HW02 switches on at 16:00 on Friday andswitches off at 6:00 on Monday.
HW02 A>DY1 FR
>DY2
>ON

+

>DY1 MO

+

>DY2

16:00

>ON

>OFF

Figure 89:

HW02 B>OFF 06:00

Signal diagram of weekend

Overnight switching
Time switch HW03 switches on overnight at 22:00 Monday
and switches off at 6:00 on Tuesday.
HW03 D>DY1 MO
>DY2
>ON

+

22:00

>OFF 06:00

Figure 90: Signal diagram for night switchingh198

If the Off time is before the On time, easy will switch off
on the following day.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Time overlaps
The time settings of a time switch overlap. The clock
switches on at 16:00 on Monday, whereas on Tuesday andWednesday it switches on at 10:00. On Monday to
Wednesday the switching-off time is 22:00.
HW04 A>DY1 MO+>DY2 WE>ON>ON>OFF 22:00

h>DY1 TU+>DY2 WE

16:00

Figure 91:

HW04 B

10:00>OFF 00:00

Signal diagram of overlaps

Switch-on and switch-off times are always based on thechannel which switches first.
Response in the event of a power failure
The power is removed between 15:00 and 17:00. The relay
drops out and remains off, even after the power returns,
since the first switching-off time was at 16:00.
HW05 A>DY1 MO>DY2 SU>OFF 16:00

h+

HW05 B>DY1 MO+>DY2 SU>ON

12:00>OFF 18:00

When switched on, easy always updates the switchingstate on the basis of all the available switching time
settings.
199

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

24 hour switching
The time switch is to switch for 24 hours. Switch-on time at
0:00 on Monday and switch-off time at 0:00 on Tuesday.
HW20 A>DY1 MO
>DY2
>ON

00:00

>OFF

+

HW20 B>DY1 TU

+

>DY2
>ON

>OFF 00:00

Year time switch
easy800 is equipped with a real-time clock which you canuse in the circuit diagram as a 7-day time switch and a year
time switch.

h

The procedure for setting the time is described under
Section “Setting date, time and daylight saving time” on
Page 273.
easy provides 32 year time switches HY01 to HY32 for a totalof 128 switching times.
Each time switch has four channels which you can use to set
four on and off times. The channels are set via the parameter
display.
The time and date are backed up in the event of a power
failure and continue to run. However, the time switch relays
will no longer continue to switch. The contacts are kept open
when de-energized. Refer to Chapter “Technical data”,
Page 317 for information on the buffer time.

200

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Wiring of a year time switch
A year time switch is integrated into the circuit diagram as acontact.
HY30Q1---------------------------Ä S 08

Figure 92:
HY30
>ON

B

+

>OFF

easy800 circuit diagram with year time switch

Parameter display and parameter set for the year time switch
HY:
HY30

Year time switch function block number 30

BTime switch channel B+

Appears in the parameter display

>ON
F

>OF

Switch on time
Switch off time

Channels
4 channels are available per time switch, channels A, B, C
and D. These channels all act on the contact of the year timeswitch.
Date
Day.Month.Year: DD.MM. YY
Example 11.11.02
On/off switch points
ON: switch on time
OFF: switch off timehThe switch on year must not be later than the switch off
year. Otherwise the year time switch will not function.
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled201

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Contacts
HY01Q1 to HY32Q1
Memory requirement for the year time switch
The year time switch function block requires 68 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per channel used.
Function of the year time switch function block
The year time switch can operate with ranges, individualdays, months, years or combinations.
Years
ON: 2002 to OFF: 2010 means:
Switch on at 00:00 on 01.01.2002 00 and switch off at
00:00 on the 01.01.2011.
Months
ON: 04 to OFF: 10 means:
Switch on at 00:00 on 1st April and switch off at 00:00 on
1st NovemberDays
ON: 02 to OFF: 25 means:
Switch on at 00:00 on the 2nd and switch off at 00:00 on the
26thRules for the year time switch
The contact switches in the defined years (ON to OFF), thedefined months (ON to OFF) and in the days entered (ON to
OFF).
Time ranges must be input with two channels, one for ON
and one for OFF.
Overlapping channels:
The first ON date switches on and the first OFF date switches
off.

h

202

Avoid incomplete entries. It hinders transparency andleads to unwanted functions.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

HY01
>ON

A

--.--.02

Function blocks+

Example 1
Year range selection
The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00:00 on
January 1 2002 and remain on until 23:59 on 31 December
2005.

+

Example 2Month range selection
The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00:00 on
01st March and remain on until 23:59 on 30th September.

>OFF --.--.05

HY01
>ON

A

__.03.-->OFF --.09.-HY01>ON

A01.--.--+>OFF 28.--.--

HY01
>ON

A

25.12.-->OFF 26.12.--+

Example 3
Day range selection
The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00:00 on the
1st of each month and remain on until 23:59 on the 28th ofeach month.
Example 4
Holiday selection
The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00:00 on the25.12 each year and remain on until 23:59 on 26.12.
“Christmas program”
Example 5
Time range selection
The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 00:00 on
01.05 each year and remain on until 23:59 on the 31.10.
“Open air season”
HY01

>ON

A

+

01.05.-->OFF --.--.--

HY01
>ON

B

--.--.--+>OFF 31.10.--203

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Example 6
Overlapping ranges
The year time switch HY01
channel A switches on at
00:00 on the 3rd of themonths 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 andremains on until 23:59 on the
25th of these months.

The year time switch HY01
channel B switches on at
00:00& on the 2nd in themonths 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
and remains on until 23:59 on
17th of these months.

HY01

HY01

>ON

A

03.05.-->OFF 25.10.--

+

>ON

B

+

02.06.-->OFF 17.12.--

Total number of channels and behaviour of the contact
HY01Q1:
The time switch will switch on at 00:00 from the 3rd May
and off at 23:59 on the 25th May.
In June, July, August, September, October, the time switch
will switch on at 00:00 on the 2nd of the month and switch
off at 23:59 on the 17th.
In November and December, the time switch will switch on
at 00:00 on the 2nd of the month and switch off at 23:59 on
the 17th.

Value scaling
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy provides 32 value scaling function blocks LS01 to LS32.
The function block enables you to convert values from one
value range to another one. In this way it is possible toreduce or increase values.
Wiring of a scaling function block
You can integrate a value scaling function block into yourcircuit as a coil.
M 48----------------------------Ä LS27EN

Figure 93:
204

easy800 circuit diagram with LS value scaling08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

LS27
>I1
>X1
>Y1
>X2
>Y2

QV>

Function blocks+

Parameter display and parameter set for the LS
function block:LS27

LS value scaling function block number 27+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Input value, actual value source range>X1

Lower value of source range>Y1

Lower value of target range>X2

Upper value of source range>Y2

Upper value of target range

QV>

Output value, scaled

Inputs
The function block inputs >I1, >X1, >X2, >Y1 and >Y2
can have the following operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Output
The function block output QV> can be assigned with thefollowing operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01

205

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Value range for inputs and outputs
Value range>I1

Input value of the function
block

>X1

Lower value of source range>X2

Lower value of target range>Y1

Upper value of source range>Y2

Upper value of target range

QV>

Output value–2147483648 to +2147483647

Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS menu
• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Coil
VC01EN to VC32EN, function block enable
Memory requirement of the LS function block
The LS function block requires 64 bytes of memory plus
4 bytes per constant on the function block input.
Function of the function blockh

The scaling function block must be enabled so that it canwork. Coil LS..EN is active. If coil LS..EN is not active, theentire function block is deactivated and reset. The output
value is set to zero.
The function block operates according to the following
equation:Y(x) = X x

Y2 – Y1
X2 – X1+

X2 x Y1 – X1 x Y2
X2 – X1

Y(x) = Actual output value of target range
X = Actual input value of source range
X1 = Lower value of source range
X2 = Upper value of source range
Y1 = Lower value of target range
Y2 = Upper value of target range
206

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

a
X1

X2

b

Y1

Figure 94:

Y2

Value scaling function block – Reduce value range

a Source rangeb Target range

a
X1

X2

b

Y1

Figure 95:

Y2

Value scaling function block – Increase value range

a Source rangeb Target range

Example 1:
The source range is a 10-bit value, source is the analog input
IA01.
The target range has 12 bits.

207

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

LS01>I1 IA01
>X1 0
>Y1 0

>X2 1023>Y2 4095

QV>+

Parameter display and parameter set for the LS01 function
block:
The actual value at the analog input IA01 is 511.
The scaled output value is 2045.
Example 2:
The source range has 12 bits.
The target range has 16 signed bits.
>I1 = DC01QV>X1 = 0>X2 = 4095
>Y1 = –32768>Y2 = +32767

The actual value at the analog input DC01QV 1789.
The scaled output value is –4137.

Jumps
Jumps can be used to optimise the structure of a circuit
diagram or to implement the function of a selector switch.
For example, jumps can be used to implement whether
manual/automatic mode, or different machine programs areto be selected.
Jumps consist of a jump location and a jump destination(label).

208

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Circuit diagram symbols for jumps
Contact
Make contact1):

Numbers

01 to 32

Coils

Ä

Numbers

01 to 32

Coil function

Ä, Å, ä, È, è1) can only be used as first leftmost contact

FunctionIf the jump coil is triggered, the circuit connections coming
directly after it will not be processed. The states of the coils
before the jump will be retained, unless they are overwritten
in circuit connections that were not missed by the jump.
Jumps are always made forwards, i.e. the jump ends on thefirst contact with the same number as that of the coil.
• Coil = jump when 1• Contact only at the first left-hand contact position = Jump
destination
The Jump contact point will always be set to 1h

Backward jumps are not possible with easy due to the way
it operates. If the jump label does not come after the jumpcoil, the jump will be made to the end of the circuit
diagram. The last circuit connection will also be skipped.
If a jump destination is not present, the jump is made to
the end of the circuit diagram.
Multiple use of the same jump coil and jump contact ispossible as long as this is implemented in pairs, i.e.:
Coil Ä:1/jumped range/Contact:1,
Coil Ä:1/jumped range/Contact:1 etc.

209

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Attention!
If rungs are skipped, the states of the coils are retained.
The time value of timing relays that have been started willcontinue to run.
Power flow display
Jumped ranges are indicated by the coils in the power flow
display.
All coils after the jump coil are shown with the symbol of thejump coil.
ExampleA selector switch allows two different sequences to be set.
• Sequence 1: Switch on Motor 1 immediately.
• Sequence 2: Switch on Guard 2, Wait time, then switch
on Motor 1.
Contacts and relays used:• I1 Sequence 1• I2 Sequence 2• I3 Guard 2 moved out• I12 Motor-protective circuit-breaker switched on• Q1 Motor 1• Q2 Guard 2• T 01 Wait time 30.00 s, on-delayed• D 01 Text “motor-protective circuit-breaker tripped”

210

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Circuit diagram:

Power flow display: I 01 selected:

I 01------Ä : 01

I 01------Ä : 01

: 01

: 01

I 02------Ä : 02--------u-Ä Q 01

h-R Q 02I 02--------: 01---------uÄ Q 01
hR Q 02----------Ä : 08----------Ä : 08

Q 02-I 03-T T 02

Q 02--I 03--: 08: 02------Ä Q 02
T 02------Ä Q 01
: 08

i 12 -------Ä D 01

Range from jump label 1 processed.

: 02--------: 08

Jump to label 8.
Range to jump label 8 skipped.

T 02--------: 08: 08

i 12 -------Ä D 01

Jump label 8, circuit diagram
processed from this point on.

Master reset
The master reset function block allows you to reset the stateof the markers and all outputs to the 0 state with a single
command. Depending on the operating mode of thisfunction block, it is possible to reset the outputs only, or themarkers only, or both. 32 function blocks are available.
M 96-----------------------------Ä MR16T

Figure 96:

MR16

Q

+

easy800 circuit diagram with master reset function
block

Parameter display and parameter set for the master
reset function block:
MR16

Master reset function block number 16

Q

Reset outputs mode+

Appears in the parameter display211

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Operating modes• Q: Acts on the outputs Q.., *Q.., S.., *S.., *SN.., QA01; *:network station address• M: acts on the marker range MD01 to MD48.
• ALL: acts on Q and M.
Contacts
MR01Q1 to MR32Q1
The contact switches on the marker if the trigger coil MR..T
has the 1 state.
Coils
MR01T to MR32T: trigger coils
Memory requirement of the data function block
The master reset function block requires 20 bytes of memory.
Function of the data master reset
The outputs or the markers are set to the 0 state inaccordance with the operating mode when a rising edge is
detected on the trigger coil.

h

The master reset function block should be used as the last
function block in a program so that all data ranges aredeleted safely. Otherwise subsequent function blocks may
overwrite the data ranges.
The contacts MR01Q1 to MR32Q1 assume the state of theirown trigger coil.

Numerical converters
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy800 provides 32 numerical converters NC01 to NC32.
A numerical converter function block enables you to convert
BCD coded values to decimal values or decimal coded values
to BCD coded values.

212

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Wiring of a numerical converter
A numerical converter in the circuit diagram only has theenable coil.
I 05---------------------------Ä NC02EN

Figure 97:
NC02 BCD

+

>I1

QV>

easy800 circuit diagram with numerical converter

Parameter display and parameter set for the numericalconverter:
NC02

Numerical converter function block number 02

BCD

Convert BCD code to decimal value mode+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Input value

QV>

Output value

In the parameter display of a numerical converter you canchange the mode and enable of the parameter display.
Numerical converter modes
Parameter

Mode

BCD

Convert BCD coded values to decimal values

BIN

Convert decimal value to BCD coded values

Number range
Value

Numbersystem–161061273 to +161061273

BCD–9999999 to +9999999

Decimal213

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800h

BCD code

Decimal value

0001

1

0010

2

0011

3

0100

4

0101

5

0110

6

0111

7

1000

8

1001

9

1010 to 1111

Not permissible

10000

10

10001

11

The BCD code only allows the number range 0hex to 9hex.
The number range Ahex to Fhex cannot be represented. The
NC function block converts the impermissible range as 9.
Inputs
The function block input >I1 can be assigned the following
operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block214

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Actual value …QV>The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Coil
NC01EN to NC32EN: enable coil.
Memory requirement of the numerical converter
The numerical converter function block requires 32 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
input.
Function of the numerical converter function blockh

The numerical converter function block must be enabled
so that it can work. Coil NC..EN is active. If coil NC..EN is
not active, the entire function block is deactivated andreset. The output value is set to zero.
BCD mode
The BCD value at >I1 is provided in decimal format at the
input. The binary value is formed from this. The binary value
is interpreted as a BCD value. Values greater than 9 (1001)
are set to the value 9. The BCD value is output as a decimalvalue at the output QV>.
Example 1:
Input value >I1: +9dec
Binary value: 1001
Decimal value QV>: + 9
Example 2:
Input value>I1: +14dec
Binary value: 1110
Decimal value QV>: + 9215

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800h

The highest binary value represented in BCD is 1001 = 9.
All higher binary values from 1010 to 1111 are output as
9. This behaviour is correct as BCD encoders normally
don't generate these values.
Example 3:
Input value>I1: 19dec
Binary value: 00010011
Decimal value QV>: 13
Example 4:
Input value>I1: 161061273dec
Binary value: 1001100110011001100110011001
Decimal value QV>: 9999999
Example 5:
Input value>I1: –61673dec
Binary value: 10000000000000001111000011101001
Decimal value QV>: –9099

h

Bit 32 is the sign bit. Bit 32 = 1 r Sign = Minus.
Example 6:
Input value>I1: 2147483647dec
Binary value: 01111111111111111111111111111111
Decimal value QV>: 9999999

h

Values greater than 161061273 are output as 9999999.
Values less than –161061273 are output as–9999999. The working range of the function block has
been exceeded.
BIN mode
The decimal value is assigned to input >I1. The decimalvalue is represented as a BCD coded value. The BCD codedvalue is interpreted as a hexadecimal value and output as adecimal value at output QV>.

216

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Example 1:
Input value >I1: +7dec
BCD binary value: 0111
Hexadecimal value: 0111
Decimal value QV>: + 7
Example 2:
Input value >I1: +11dec
BCD binary value: 00010001
Hexadecimal value: 00010001
Decimal value QV>: +17 (1 + 16)
Hexadecimal value:
Bit 0 has the value 1.
Bit 4 has the value 16
Total: Bit 0 plus Bit 4 = 17
Example 3:
Input value >I1: 19dec
BCD binary value: 00011001
Hexadecimal value: 00011001
Decimal value QV>: 25 (1 + 8 + 16)
Example 4:
Input value >I1: 9999999dec
BCD binary value: 1001100110011001100110011001
Hexadecimal value: 1001100110011001100110011001
Decimal value QV>: 161061273
Example 5:
Input value >I1:–61673dec
BCD binary value:
10000000000001100001011001110011
Hexadecimal value:
10000000000001100001011001110011
Decimal value QV>: –398963

h

Bit 32 is the sign bit. Bit 32 = 1 r Sign = Minus.
Example 6:
Input value >I1: 2147483647dec
BCD binary value:
01111111111111111111111111111111
217

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Hexadecimal value:
01111111111111111111111111111111
Decimal value QV>: 161061273

hValues greater than 9999999 are output as 161061273.
Values less than –9 999999 are output as–161061273. The working range of the function block
has been exceeded.

Operating hours countereasy800 provides 4 independent operating hours counters.
The counter states are retained even when the device isswitched off. As long as the enable coil of the operating
hours counter is active, easy800 counts the hours in minutecycles.
I 10-----------------------------Ä OT01EN
M 42-----------------------------Ä OT01RE
OT01Q1---------------------------Ä Q 01

Figure 98:
OT04
>I1

QV>

+

easy800 circuit diagram with operating hours counter.

Parameter display and parameter set for the operating hours
counter function block:
OT04

Operating hours counter number 04+

Appears in the parameter display
>I1

QV>

Upper threshold value in hours
Actual value of the operating hours counter

Contacts
OT01Q1 to OT04Q1
The contact switches when the upper threshold value has
been reached (greater than or equal to).
Coils
• OT01EN to OT04EN: enable coil
• OT01RE to OT04RE: reset coil218

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Memory requirement of the operating hours counter
The operating hours counter function block requires 36 bytes
of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
input.
Function of the operating hours counter function
block
If the enable coil OT..EN is triggered to the 1 state, thecounter adds the value 1 to its actual value every minute(basic clock rate: 1 minute).
If the actual value on QV> reaches the setpoint value of >I1,
the contact OT..Q1 switches for as long as the actual value
is greater than or equal to the setpoint value.
The actual value is retained in the unit until the Reset coil
OT..RE is actuated. The actual value is then set to zero.

hOperating mode change RUN, STOP, Voltage On, Off,
Delete program, Change program, Load new program. All
these actions do not delete the actual value of theoperating hours counter.
Accuracy
The operating hours counter is accurate to the nearest
minute. If the enable coil signal is terminated within aminute, the value for seconds is lost.
The value range of the operating hours counter is between 0
hours and 100 years.

PUT, send a value onto the network
The function block allows you to selectively send a 32 bit
value onto the network. The PUT function block provides
data on the easy-NET that another station indicates it
requires via the GET function block.
T 01Q1---------------------------Ä PT16T
PT16Q1---------------------------Ä C 01C

Figure 99:

easy800 circuit diagram with PUT function block219

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

PT01 11>I1-

Parameter display and parameter set for the PUT function
block:PT01-

PUT function block (places a value onto the network),
number 11
Does not appear in the parameter display>I1

Setpoint value which is put onto the easy-NET network

Input
The function block input >I1 can be assigned the following
operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function blockContacts
PT01Q1 to PT32Q1: state of the trigger coil
Coils
PT01T to PT32T: trigger coils
Memory requirement of the PUT function block
The PUT function block requires 36 bytes of memory plus
4 bytes per constant on the function block input.
PUT diagnostics
The PUT function block only functions when the easy-NET
network is functioning correctly (a Section “Signs of life of
the individual stations and diagnostics”, Page 259).

220

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Function of the PUT function block
1

2

3

Figure 100: Signal diagram of PUT function block
1: trigger coil
2: trigger coil contact feedback
3: send

Pulse width modulation
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy800 provides 2 pulse width modulation function blocks
PW01 and PW02. The function blocks are connected directly
to the outputs.
They are assigned as follows:
PW01 r Q1
PW02 r Q2hWhen using the pulse width modulation function blockwith a minimum on time of less than 1 s only use devices
with transistor outputs.
The pulse width modulation function block is primarily used
for outputting the manipulated variable of a PID controller.
The maximum frequency is 200 kHz. This corresponds to aperiod duration of 5 ms. The maximum period duration is65.5 s.
Wiring a pulse width modulation function block
A pulse width modulation function block is integrated in thecircuit diagram as a contact or coil.

221

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800h

To prevent unpredictable switching states, use each coil ofa relay once only in the circuit diagram.
M 95---------------------------Ä PW01EN
PW01E1-------------------------Ä M 96

Figure 101: easy800 circuit diagram with pulse width modulation.
PW02
>SV

+

>PD
>ME

Parameter display and parameter set for pulse widthmodulation:
PW02

Pulse width modulation function block number 02+

Appears in the parameter display>SV

Manipulated variable input>PD

Period duration in ms>ME

Minimum on duration, minimum off duration in ms

The parameter display for a timing relay is used to modify theperiod duration, the minimum on time and the enabling of
the parameter display.
Value and time rangeshParameter

Value and time range

Resolution

SV

0 to 4095

1 digitPD

0 to 65535

msME

0 to 65535

ms

The minimum time setting for the period duration is:0.005 s (5 ms)
Inputs
The function block inputs >SV, >PD and >ME can be
assigned the following operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB

222

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Contacts
PW01E1 to PW02E1, the minimum on duration or theminimum off duration was undershot.
Coils
PW01EN to PW02EN, enable coil.
Memory requirement of the function block
The pulse width modulation function block requires 48 bytes
of memory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
input.
Function of the pulse width modulation function
block

h

The pulse width modulation function block must be
enabled so that it can work. Coil PW..EN is active. If coil
PW..EN is not active, the entire function block isdeactivated and reset. The output value is set to zero.
The manipulated variable at function block input >SV isconverted to a pulse string with a constant period duration.
The pulse width is proportional to the manipulated variable
SV. The period duration and the minimum on duration canbe selected as required within the specified limits.
The function block causes a direct output of the pulse to thecorresponding output. The output image of the circuit
diagram is always updated.
223

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800h

The following applies if the output of a pulse widthmodulator is used as a coil in the circuit diagram:
The state of the output is not refreshed from the circuit
diagram.

h

The following applies to the minimum on duration:• The minimum on duration is the same as the minimum
off duration.
• The minimum on duration must not exceed 10 % of theperiod duration. The ratio of period duration/minimum
on duration (P/M) determines which percentage of themanipulated variable has no effect. The minimum on
duration must be set as low as possible so that P/M ratio
is as high as possible. If the minimum on duration mustnot be too low, due to the output relay, the period
duration must be increased accordingly.
• The minimum on duration is 1 ms.
• If the actual value of the pulse length is less than theminimum on duration, the minimum on duration has theeffect of the pulse time. Note the state of the contact
PW..E1.
• If the off duration of the pulse is less than the minimum
on duration, outputs Q1 and Q2 are continuously inoperation. Note the state of the contact PW..E1.

Setting date/time
This function block allows you to selectively place the date
and time onto the network. All other stations accept the date
and time of the sending station. The function block name isSC01 (send clock).
HW01QW1---------------------------Ä SC01T

Figure 102: easy800 circuit diagram with SC function block224

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Parameter display and parameter set for the SC
function block:
The SC01 function block has no parameters as it is a
triggered system service.
Coil
SC01T: trigger coil
Memory requirement of the SC function block
The SC function block requires 20 bytes of memory.
SC diagnostics
The SC function block only functions when the easy-NET
network is functioning correctly (a Section “Signs of life of
the individual stations and diagnostics”, Page 259).
Function of the date/time function block
If the trigger coil of the function block is activated, thecurrent date, the day of the week and time from the sending
station is automatically put onto the easy-NET network. Allother network stations must accept these values.

hThe station that sends its date and time does this when
the seconds value is zero.
Example: The trigger pulse is actuated at 03:32:21(hh:mm:ss). The other stations are synchronised at
03:33:00. This time is accessed by all other stations.
This process can be repeated as often as desired. The trigger
coil must be triggered again from the 0 to the 1 state.
Accuracy of time synchronisation
The maximum time deviation between the functional
stations is 5 s.

225

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Set cycle time
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy800 provides one set cycle time function block ST01. The
set cycle time function block is an additional function blockfor the PID controller.
The set cycle time function block provides a fixed cycle time
for processing the circuit diagram and the function blocks.
Wiring a set cycle time function block
The ST set cycle time function block is integrated in thecircuit diagram as a coil.

h

To prevent unpredictable switching states, use each coil ofa relay once only in the circuit diagram.
-------------------------------Ä ST01EN

Figure 103: easy800 circuit diagram with enabling of set cycle timefunction block.
ST01
>I1

+

Parameter display for set cycle time:
ST01

Set cycle time function block number 01+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Set cycle time

The parameter display for a timing relay is used to modify theset cycle time, the minimum on time and the enabling of theparameter display.
Time range

226

Parameter

Value and time range

Resolution

I1

0 to 1000ms

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Inputs
The function block input >I1 can be assigned the following
operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Coils
ST01EN, enable coil.
Memory requirement of the function block
The set cycle time function block requires 24 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
input.
Function of the set cycle time function block
The function block is used to define a fixed cycle time.

h

The function block must be enabled so that it can work.
Coil ST01EN is active. If coil ST01EN is not active, theentire function block is deactivated and reset.
Actual cycle time is less than the set cycle time:
If the maximum cycle time present is less than the set cycle
time, the set cycle time is constant.
Actual cycle time is greater than the set cycle time:
If the maximum cycle time present is greater than the set
cycle time, the set cycle time has no effect.
227

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Attention!
The shorter the cycle time, the faster the control andregulation process.
Set the set cycle time as short as possible. The processingof the function blocks, reading of the inputs and writing of
outputs is only carried out once every cycle. Exception: Allfunction blocks that are processed irrespective of thecontroller.

Timing relay
easy800 provides 32 timing relays from T 01 to T 32.
A timing relay is used to change the switching duration andthe make and break times of a relay contact. The delay times
can be configured between 5 ms and 99 h 59 min.
Wiring a timing relay
You integrate a timing relay into your circuit in the form of acontact and coil. The function of the relay is defined via theparameter display. The relay is started via the trigger coil
T..EN and can be selectively reset via the reset coil T..RE. The
actual timeout running can be stopped via the third coil
T..ST.

hTo prevent unpredictable switching states, use each coil ofa relay once only in the circuit diagram.
I
I
T
I

01---------------------------Ä
02---------------------------Ä
02Q1-------------------------Ä
03---------------------------Ä

T
T
Q
T

02EN
02RE
01
02ST

Figure 104: easy800 circuit diagram with timing relay

228

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

T 02 X
>I1

M:S +

>I2

QV>

Function blocks

Parameter display and parameter set for timing relay:
T 02

Timing relay function block number 02

X

On-delayed mode

M:STime range Minute: Seconds+

Appears in the parameter display
>I1
>I2

QV>

Time setpoint value 1
Time setpoint value I2 (on a timing relay with 2 setpointvalues)Timed-out actual time in RUN mode

The parameter display for a timing relay is used to modify theswitching function, time base or setpoint times and enable
the parameter display.
Timing relay modes
Parameter

Switch function

X

On-delayed switching?X

On-delayed with random time rangeâOff-delayed switching?â
XâOff-delayed with random time range
On and off delayed#

Off-delayed with random time range, retriggerable?#

Off-delayed with random time range, retriggerable?Xâ

On and off delayed switching with random time, 2 time setpoints

ü

Switch with single-pulseÜSwitch with flashing, synchronous, 2 time setpoint valuesÜ

Switch with flashing, asynchronous, 2 time setpoint values229

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Time range
Parameter
S

000.000

M:S 00:00
H:M 00:00hTime range and setpoint time

Resolution

Seconds, 0.005 to 999.995 s for constantsand variable values

5 ms

Minutes: Seconds 00:00 to 99:59 only forconstants and variable values

1s

Hours: Minutes, 00:00 to 99:59 only forconstants and variable values

1 min.

Minimum time setting:
0.005 s (5 ms).
If a time value is less than the easy cycle time, the elapsed
time will only be recognised in the next cycle.
Inputs
The function block inputs >I1 and >I2 can have thefollowing operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Outputs
Actual value …QV>The actual value …QV> can be assigned the following
operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01

230

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Variable setpoint values
Behaviour of the setpoint value when variable values areused.
• Variable values can be used.
• Variable values must be transferred using operands.
• With the time base “s” the value is accepted as a “value
in ms”.
• The last position is rounded up to a zero or five.
• With the time base “M:S” the value is accepted as a“value in s”.
• With the time base “H:M:” the value is accepted as a“value in M (minutes)”.

h

The delay times are the same as described for theconstants.
Example:Time base “s”
The operand has the value 9504.
The time value is 9.50 s.
Operand value 45507
The time value is 45.510 s.
Time base “M:S”
The operand has the value 5999.
The time value is 99 min, 59 s: This is the maximum value.
Time base “H:M”
The operand has the value 5999.
The time value is 99 h, 59 min.
Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Contacts
T 01Q1 to T 32Q1

231

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Coils• T 01EN to T 32EN: trigger coil;• T 01RE to T 32RE: reset coil;• T 01ST to T 32ST: stop coil.
Memory requirement of the timing relay
The time relay function block requires 48 bytes of memory
plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block input.
Retention
Timing relays can be operated with retentive actual values.
The number of retentive timing relays can be selected in the
SYSTEM r RETENTION menu.
If a timing relay is retentive, the actual value is retained
when the operating mode changes from RUN to STOP as
well as when the power supply is switched off.
If easy is started in RUN mode, the timing relay operates withthe retentively saved actual value. The state of the trigger
impulse must correspond to the function of the timing relay.
1 signal when:• on-delayed,• single pulse,• flashing.
0 status for offdelayed.
Function of the timing relay function block
Timing relay, on-delayed with and without random
switching
Random switching
The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within the
setpoint value range.

23208/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

1

2

3

4
t

ts
A

B

t1 + t 2 = t sCFigure 105: Signal diagram of timing relay, on-delayed(with and without random switching)
1: trigger coil T..EN
2: stop coil T..ST
3: reset coil T..RE
4: switching contact (make contact) T..Q1
ts: setpoint time
• Range A:
The set time elapses normally.
• Range B:
The entered setpoint does not elapse normally because thetrigger coil drops out prematurely.
• Range C:
The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing.

233

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

1

2

3

4
ts

tF

ts
D

E

ts
F

Figure 106: Signal diagram of timing relay, on-delayed(with and without random switching)• Range D:
The Stop coil is inoperative after the time has elapsed.
• Range E:
The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact.
• Range F:
The Reset coil resets the time during the timeout. After the Resetcoil drops out, the time elapses normally.

Timing relay, off-delayed with and without random
switching
Random switching, with and without retriggering
The contact of the timing relay randomly switches within theset value range.
Retriggering
When the time is running and the trigger coil is reactivatedor deactivated, the actual value is reset to zero. The set timeof the timing relay is timed out once more.

234

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

1

2

3

4

A

ts

t1 + t 2 = t s
B

C

ts

t
D

Figure 107: Signal diagram of offdelayed timing relay(with/without random switching, with/without
retriggering)
1: trigger coil T..EN
2: stop coil T..ST
3: reset coil T..RE
4: switching contact (make contact) T..Q1
ts: setpoint time
• Range A:
The time elapses after the trigger coil is deactivated.
• Range B:
The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing.
• Range C:
The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact. After the Resetcoil drops out, the relay continues to work normally.
• Range D:
The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact when the function
block is timing out.

235

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

1

2

3

4
t1 + t 2 = ts
E

t1

F

ts

Figure 108: Signal diagram of offdelayed timing relay(with/without random switching, with/without
retriggering)• Range E:
The Trigger coil drops out twice. The set time ts consists of t1 plus
t2 (switch function not retriggerable).
• Range F:
The Trigger coil drops out twice. The actual time t1 is cleared andthe set time ts elapses completely (retriggerable switch
function).

Timing relay, on-delayed and off-delayed with andwithout random switching
Time value >I1: On-delayed time
Time value >I2: Off-delayed time
Random switching
The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within the
setpoint value range.

236

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

1

2

3

4
ts1

A

ts2

t
B

t1 + t2 = ts1 ts2
C

ts1

D

ts2

Figure 109: Signal diagram of timing relay, on and off-delayed 1
1: trigger coil T..EN
2: stop coil T..ST
3: reset coil T..RE
4: switching contact (make contact) T..Q1
ts1: pick-up time
ts2: drop-out time
• Range A:
The relay processes the two times without any interruption.
• Range B:
The trigger coil drops out before the on-delay is reached.
• Range C:
The Stop coil stops the timeout of the on-delay.
• Range D:
The stop coil has no effect in this range.

237

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

1

2

3

4
ts1

t1 + t2 = ts2
E

ts1

t
F

ts1
G

ts2

Figure 110: Signal diagram of timing relay, on and off-delayed 2• Range E:
The Stop coil stops the timeout of the off-delay.
• Range F:
The Reset coil resets the relay after the on delay has elapsed• Range G:
The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact whilst the on delay
is timing out. After the Reset coil drops out, the time elapses
normally.

1

2

3

4
ts1

t
H

Figure 111: Signal diagram of timing relay, on and off-delayed 3• Range H:
The Reset signal interrupts the timing out of the set time.

238

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Timing relay, single pulse
1

2

3

4
ts
A

ts
B

t1 + t 2 = t sCFigure 112: Signal diagram of timing relay, single pulse 1
1: trigger coil T..EN
2: stop coil T..ST
3: reset coil T..RE
4: switching contact (make contact) T..Q1• Range A:
The trigger signal is short and is lengthened• Range B:
The Trigger signal is longer than the set time.
• Range C:
The Stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time.

239

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

1

2

3

4
t

t

ts

D

E

Figure 113: Signal diagram of timing relay, single pulse 2• Range D:
The Reset coil resets the timing relay.
• Range E:
The Reset coil resets the timing relay. The Trigger coil is still
activated after the Reset coil has been deactivated and the timeis still running.

Timing relay, synchronous and asynchronous flashing
Time value >I1: Pulse time
Time value >I2: Pause time
Synchronous (symmetrical) flashing: >I1 equal >I2
Asynchronous flashing: >I1 not equal >I2

1

2

3

4
ts1

ts2

ts1

ts2

ts1

A

t
ts2

ts1

ts2

ts1

t1 +
B

t2 = ts2

ts1

ts2
C

Figure 114: Signal diagram of timing relay, synchronous andasynchronous flashing
1: trigger coil T..EN240

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

2: stop coil T..ST
3: reset coil T..RE
4: switching contact (make contact) T..Q1• Range A:
The relay flashes for as long as the Trigger coil is activated.
• Range B:
The Stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time.
• Range C:
The Reset coil resets the relay.

Value limitation
This function block is available from device version 04.
easy800 provides 32 value limitation function blocks VC01
to VC32. The value limitation function block allows you tolimit values. You can define an upper and lower limit value.
The function block will then only output values within theselimits.
Wiring of a value limitation function block
You can integrate a value limitation function block into yourcircuit as a coil.
M 48----------------------------Ä VC27EN

Figure 115: easy800 circuit diagram with VC value limitation
VC27
>I1
>SH
>SL

QV>

+

Parameter display and parameter set for the VC function
block:VC27

VC value limitation function block number 27+

Appears in the parameter display>I1

Input value>SH

Upper limit value>SL

Lower limit value

QV>

Output value limited241

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

Inputs
The function block inputs >I1, >SH and >SL can be
assigned the following operands:• Constants• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog inputs IA01 to IA04
– IA01: terminal I7– IA02: terminal I8– IA03: terminal I11– IA04: terminal I12• Analog output QA01
• Actual value … QV> of another function block
Output
The function block output QV> can be assigned with thefollowing operands:• Markers MD, MW, MB• Analog output QA01
Value range for inputs and outputs
Value range>I1

Input value>SH

Upper limit value>SL

Lower limit value

QV>

Output value–2147483648 to +2147483647

Displaying the parameter set in the PARAMETERS
menu• + Access enabled• – Access disabled
Coil
VC01EN to VC32EN, function block enable242

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocks

Memory requirement of the value limitation functionblock
The value limitation function block requires 40 bytes ofmemory plus 4 bytes per constant on the function block
input.
Function of the value limitation function blockh

The function block must be enabled so that it can work.
Coil VC..EN is active. If coil VC..EN is not active, the entire
function block is deactivated and reset. The output value
is set to zero.
The value is accepted at input VC...I1 if the enable coil isactive. If the value is greater than the upper limit value orless than the lower limit value, the respective limit value is
output at VC..QV.

Example with timing relay and counter function block
A warning light flashes when the counter reaches 10. In theexample, both function blocks C 01 and T 01 are wired.
L01+

P1

S2

S1

C

K1T

R

P1

H1

K1T

L01–
Counter
Value 102s

Figure 116: Hardwiring with relays243

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

L01+
L01–

S1

+24 V 0 V
1

S2

I5 I6
2

Q1
H1
L01–

Figure 117: Wiring with easy...-DC-R...

I
I
C
T

05---------------------------Ä
06---------------------------Ä
01---------------------------Ä
01Q1-------------------------Ä

C
C
T
Q

01C
01RE
01EN
01

Figure 118: easy800 wiring and circuit diagram

Entering function block parameters from the circuit
diagram.
You can access the parameter input from the contact as well
as from a coil.
X Enter the circuit diagram up to C 01 as a coil.
C 01C is the counter coil of the counter 01 function block.
I
I
C
T

05---------------------------Ä
06---------------------------Ä
01---------------------------Ä
01Q1-------------------------Ä

C
C
T
Q

Figure 119: easy800 wiring and circuit diagram
X Keep the cursor on the number.
X Press the OK button.

244

01C
01RE
01EN
01

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Function blocksh
C 01

The first part of the parameter set of a counter is displayed.

+>SH +10

If the cursor is on the contact number, easy800 will call up
the parameter display when you press OK.
X Proceed with the cursor í over the + character to the value

input behind >SH:
– >SH means: function block input upper counter
setpoint value– The + character means that the parameters of thistiming relay can be modified using the PARAMETERSmenu.
X Change the upper counter setpoint to 10:– Use ú í to move the cursor onto the tens digit.
– Use ÍÚ to modify the value of the digit.
X Press OK to save the value and ESC to return to the circuit
diagram.

>SL
>SV

h

easy800 has specific parameter displays for the function
blocks. The meaning of these parameters is explained
under each function block type.
X Enter the circuit diagram up to contact T 01 of the timing

relay. Set the parameters for T 01.

T 01 Ü

S>I1 002.000>I2 002.000

QV>+

The timing relay works like a flashing relay. The easy800
symbol for the flashing relay is Ü. The function is set on the
top right beside the number in the parameter display.
The time base is set to the right of the “flashing” function.
Leave the time base set to S for seconds.
X Proceed with the cursor to the right over the + character inorder to input the time setpoint value >I1.

If the same setpoint value is input for >I1 and >I2, thetiming relay functions as a synchronous flasher.
The + character means that the parameters of this timing
relay can be modified using the PARAMETERS menu.
245

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Wiring with easy800

X Confirm the value input with OK.
X Press ESC to leave circuit diagram entry.
X Complete the circuit diagram.
X Test the circuit diagram using the power flow display.
X Switch easy800 to RUN mode and return to the circuit

diagram.
Each parameter set can be displayed using the power flow
display for the circuit diagram.
X Move the cursor onto C 01 and press OK.
C 01

The parameter set for the counter is displayed with actualand setpoint values.

+>SL

X Move the cursor Ú downwards until you see the value

>SV

QV>.

QV>+0

C 01

X Switch the input I5. The actual value changes.

+>SL

On the display C_ indicates that the counting coil is
actuated.

>SV

QV>+1

If the actual and upper setpoint values of the counter are thesame, the timing relay switches the warning light on and off
every 2 seconds.

.. C_ .. ..

T 01 Ü

S

Doubling the flashing frequency:+

X Select the power flow display T 01 and change the>I1 001.000

constant of the setpoint time to 001.000.
When you press OK, the warning light will flash at twice thefrequency.

>I2

QV> 0.550.. EN..

On the display EN indicates that the enable coil is actuated.
Setpoint value settings with constants can be modified via
the PARAMETERS menu.

h246

The actual value is only displayed in RUN mode. Call up
the parameter display for this via the power flow display
or PARAMETERS menu.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

5Introduction to easy-NET

easy-NET network

All easy800 units have an easy-NET network interface
connection. This network is designed for eight stations.
Using the easy-NET you can:
• Process additional inputs and outputs.
• Implement faster and improved control using
decentralised programs.
• Synchronise date and time
• Read and write inputs and outputs.
• Send values to other stations.
• Receive values from other stations.
• Load programs from or to other stations.
The easy-NET network is based on the CAN network(Controller Area Network). CAN is specified by theISO 11898 standard. CAN has the following in-built
features:• Message oriented transmission protocol.
• Multimaster bus access capabilities with non-destructive
bitwise bus arbitration via priority messaging (Arbitration:
An instance which defines which hardware can use thebus next).
• Multicast broadcast messaging with receiver side message
filtering.
• High level of real-time capability (short reaction time forhigh priority messages, short fault message get times).
• Functionality in environments with severe interference(short block lengths).
• High level of error security.

h

CAN has been used as the basis for the design of theeasy-NET network. The messages have been adapted andoptimised to suit the requirements of the easy800
environment.
247

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET networkeasy-NET network
topologies, addressing
and functions

The easy-NET allows the configuration of a line topology.
There are two wiring methods which can be used for therequired addressing options:• “Loop through the unit” wiring arrangement,• Wiring arrangement using a T connector and a spur line.

Loop through the unit wiring method
With this wiring method it is possible to implement theaddressing of the stations via station 1 or the
EASY-SOFT(-PRO). If the line is interrupted, the network is nolonger operational from this point in the network.

T connector and spur line
Each device must be addressed individually with this wiring
method by:• Downloading the program,• Downloading the address with EASY-SOFT (-PRO),• Using the display or• The device is already assigned with an address.
If a spur line is removed on a station, all other devices in the
network remain functional.

h248

The spur line between the T connector and the device must
not exceed 0.3 m. Otherwise communication via easy-NET
may be impaired.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network topologies,
addressing and functions

Topology and addressing examples
Physicallocation,
place

Station number
Example1

Example21

1

1

Loop through theunit

easy800
easy...E
MFD

2

2

3

4

5

7

8

easy...E

easy800
MFD

easy...E

easy800
MFD

easy...E

easy800
MFD

easy...E

easy800
MFD

easy...E

easy800
MFD

easy...E

easy800
MFD

easy...E7
easy800
easy...E
MFD

6

easy800
MFD8
easy800
easy...EMFD

5easy...E4
easy800
easy...E
MFD

4

easy800
MFD3
easy800
easy...E
MFD

3

T connector and spur
line

6

2

7

6

8

5

easy800
easy...E
MFD
easy800
easy...E
MFD
easy800
easy...E
MFD• Example 1: physical location is the same as the station
number• Example 2: physical location is not the same as the station
number (with the exception that location 1 is the same asstation 1).

hPhysical location 1 is always assigned as station 1. Station
1 is the only station which must be present.
249

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network

Position and addressing of the operands via easy-NET
Stati
ons

Basic unit

Local expansion

Network bit data

Network worddata
Receive

Send

Input

OutputInput

OutputInput

Output

I

Q

R

S

RN

SN

1

1I1
to 16

1 Q 1 to 8 1 R 1
to 16

1 S 1 to 8 2 to 8 RN 2 to 8
1 to 32
SN 1
to 32

GT 1
to 32

PT 1
to 32

2

2I1
to 16

2 Q 1 to 8 2 R 1
to 16

2 S 1 to 8 1, 3 to 8
RN 1
to 32

1, 3 to 8
SN 1
to 32

GT 1
to 32

PT 1
to 32

3

3I1
to 16

3 Q 1 to 8 3 R 1
to 16

3 S 1 to 8 1, 2, 4 to 1, 2, 4
8 RN 1 to to 8 SN 1
32
to 32

GT 1
to 32

PT 1
to 32

4

4I1
to 16

4 Q 1 to 8 4 R 1
to 16

4 S 1 to 8 1 to 3, 5 1 to 3, 5
to 8 RN 1 to 8 SN 1
to 32
to 32

GT 1
to 32

PT 1
to 32

5

5I1
to 16

5 Q 1 to 8 5 R 1
to 16

5 S 1 to 8 1 to 4, 6 1 to 4, 6
to 8 RN 1 to 8 SN 1
to 32
to 32

GT 1
to 32

PT 1
to 32

6

6I1
to 16

6 Q 1 to 8 6 R 1
to 16

6 S 1 to 8 1 to 5, 7, 1 to 5, 7,
8 RN 1 to 8 SN 1
32
to 32

GT 1
to 32

PT 1
to 32

7

7I1
to 16

7 Q 1 to 8 7 R 1
to 16

7 S 1 to 8 1 to 6, 8
RN 1
to 32

GT 1
to 32

PT 1
to 32

8

8I1
to 16

8 Q 1 to 8 8 R 1
to 16

8 S 1 to 8 1 to 7 RN 1 to 7
1 to 32
SN 1
to 32

GT 1
to 32

PT 1
to 32

h

250

1 to 6, 8
SN 1
to 32

The RN-SN connection is a point to point connection
between the stations indicated. With RN and SN thenumber of the contact must have the same number as thecoil. Example: 2SN30 from station 8 is sent to 8RN30 of
station 2.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network topologies,
addressing and functionshEvery station with a circuit diagram has read access to thephysical station inputs and outputs of other stations andcan process them locally.
Example 1
Station 1 is to read the input I1 of station 2 and write tooutput Q1 of station 2. Station 2 does not have a circuit
diagram.
2I 01-----------------------------Ä2Q 01

Figure 120: Circuit diagram in station 1

Example 2:Marker M 01 of station 4 is to switch the output Q1 ofstation 3 via the network. Both stations have a circuit
diagram.
M 01-----------------------------Ä3SN 01

Figure 121: Circuit diagram in station 4: Set coil 01 in station 3

4RN 01-----------------------------Ä Q 01

Figure 122: Circuit diagram in station 3: Get value from coil 01 in
station 4251

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network

Functions of the stations in the network
The stations on the easy-NET can have two different
functions:• Intelligent stations with their own programs (stations 1 to 8)• Input/output devices (REMOTE IO) without their own
program (stations 2 to 8)hStation 1 must always have a circuit diagram.

Possible write and read authorisation in the network
The stations have differing read and write authorisation in
the easy-NET network according to their functions andconfiguration.
Station 1
Authorised read access to all inputs and outputs of all
stations regardless of the function. Observe the setting of
SEND IO (a Section “Send each change on the inputs/
outputs (SEND IO)”, Page 255).
Authorised write access to the station's own local outputs.
Authorised write access to the physical digital outputs of thestations which are functioning as input/output devices.
Write authorisation to the network bit data 2 to 8 – SN 1 to
32.
Stations 2 to 8
Input/output device function
No read and write authorisation.
Intelligent station function
Authorised read access to all inputs and outputs of all
stations regardless of the function. Observe the setting of
SEND IO (a Section “Send each change on the inputs/
outputs (SEND IO)”, Page 255).
Write authorisation to its own local outputs.
Write authorisation to the network bit data SN 1 to 32.
252

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Configuration of the easy-NET
network

Configuration of theeasy-NET networkeasy-NET can be configured so that it can be optimised foryour application.

Station number
The station number is identified as the NET-ID: in the device.
The station number can be set on devices with a display
using the buttons on the easy800.

h

All the easy-NET settings are best carried out on station 1.
The entire network can be configured via station 1. The
configuration should only be carried out locally when adevice is replaced.
Valid station numbers for operation are 01 to 08.
Station number 00 = factory default settingWith station number 00, double address assignment cannot
occur when an existing device is being exchanged.

Transmission speed
The easy800 device hardware allows you set transmission
speeds between 10 and 1000 KBaud in specific stages. In
doing so, the length of all cables is linked to the maximum
data transfer rate (a chapter “Technical data”, Page 330).
The data transfer rate is set under the BAUDRATE: menu
item.
Possible baud rates are: 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 and1000 KB
125 KB = factory default setting

253

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network

Pause time, changing the write repetition ratemanually
Every easy-NET network connection automaticallydetermines the number of stations which are active on the
network, the baud rate which is used and the total numberof bytes which are transmitted. The minimum pause time
which a device requires is automatically determined using
this data in order to ensure that all devices can send theirmessages. If a pause time is to be increased, the value of the
BUSDELAY: must be set greater than zero.
Value “1” doubles the pause time, value “15” will increase
it by a factor of 16.
tpnew = tp x (1 + n)
tpnew = new pause time
tp = pause time determined by the networkn = value on BUSDELAYh

An extension of the pause time means that fewer
messages (inputs, outputs, bit data, word data) aretransferred per time unit.
The reaction speed of the entire controller depends on thebaud rate, the pause time and the quantity of transferreddata.
The smaller the amount of data transferred, the faster thereaction times of the system.

h254

An increase in the pause time is only useful duringcommissioning. To ensure that the data for the power flow
display is updated faster in the PC, a longer range for thisdata is created on the network within this pause time.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Configuration of the easy-NET
network

Send each change on the inputs/outputs (SEND IO)
The SEND IO function should be used if you wish to send anychange in input or output status immediately to all othernetwork stations. SEND IO should be activated if intelligent
stations have read access to the inputs and outputs of otherstations (2I 02, 8Q 01, etc.).
SEND IOåThis means that the quantity of messages on the network
can increase significantly.

hIf high-speed counters are used, the SEND IO function
should be deactivated. Otherwise the input data is writtenvery rapidly onto the network as they change continuously
leading to unnecessary loading of the network.
If intelligent devices are required to exchange bit
information, it should be implemented via RN and SN.
SEND IO å = factory default setting

Automatic change of the RUN and STOP mode
REMOTE RUN should be activated if stations 2 to 8 are toautomatically follow the mode change of station 1 during
operation.

hInput and output devices must always have SEND IO
activated, to ensure that station 1 always receives up-todate input and output data.

hIntelligent stations with display only follow the operating
mode change when the display is showing the Status
display or a text.
The following is of utmost importance duringcommissioning!
255

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network

Attention!
If several engineers are commissioning a machine orsystem involving several spatially separated elements via
the easy-NET network, it must be ensured that REMOTE
RUN is not activated.
Otherwise unwanted machine or system starts may occur
during commissioning. The associated events depend on
the machines or systems.
REMOTE RUN å = factory default setting

Input/output device (REMOTE IO) configuration
All devices are factory set for operation as input and output
devices. This has the advantage that devices can be used
immediately as I/O devices, regardless of whether they havea display or not. You only need to assign the station number.
This can be implemented via EASY-SOFT(-PRO) or on a
Station 1 with a display.
If you want to assign a device as an intelligent station on the
network, the REMOTE IO should be deactivated.
REMOTE IO

Figure 123: Remote IO deactivated256

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Configuration of the easy-NET
network

The standard settings for the input and output devices are:
SEND IO

REMOTE RUNREMOTE IOååå

Station number (easy-NET-ID) and baud rate can be specified
via station 1.

Displaying the Status display of other stations
On every device with a display, you can display the states of
the inputs and outputs of each network station.
1I12..........
I NT1

MO 06:42

1Q1.......

P-

RUN

3I12.....7....
I NT3

MO 06:42

3Q1.3..6..

P-

MO 06:45

3S1.3..6..

The cursor changes to the display of the network station NT..
and flashes. The station number is displayed in front of the
inputs and outputs.
X Change to the number of the required station with the Íand Ú cursor buttons.
X Press the OK button.

RUN

3R12.....7....
I NT3 DCX Change to the Status display and press the ESC button.

P-

RUN

h

X If you want to view the state of the inputs and outputs ofa local expansion, press the OK button.
If you press the ESC button again or the OK button, thedisplay of the input and output states of the station is
terminated.
The station showing the status on its display cannot read
its own data from the network.
Example: NT3 flashes on station 3. The inputs and outputs
3I.., 3R.., 3Q.. and 3S.. cannot be displayed.
If the NT3 display is not flashing, the inputs and outputs
are shown.
257

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network

Station message types
The easy-NET network recognises various message types.
They are:• Output data of station 1 (Q., S.) which is sent to stations
without programs.
• Network outputs and inputs sent and received between
stations with programs (*SN, *RN).
• Data sent and received via the network between stations
with programs (PT and GT function blocks).
• Inputs, outputs, station status (I, R, Q, S) transfers.
• Loading programs to and from every station.
The easy-NET network is based on a CAN (Controller Area
Network) system. Each message type has its own ID. The
message priority is determined via the respective ID. This isimportant in transmission borderline cases to ensure that all
messages reach their destination.

Transfer behaviour
Network CPU data transfer to program image
The easy800 network connection is equipped with its own
CPU. Network data can therefore be processed whilst the
program is running. After each program cycle, the status of
the network data is written to the operand image of the
program and the send data is read from the image. The
program runs through the next cycle with this data.
Reading and sending the network data from the CPU
The network CPU of the station reads every message on the
network. If the message is relevant to the station, it isaccepted into a message memory.
If the content of the sent message changes, this is sent.
Transmission only occurs when there is no message on the
network.

258

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Configuration of the easy-NET
networkeasy-NET is configured so that every station can send its
messages. This means that the station must observe a pause
time between sending messages. The pause time increases
the higher the number of stations and the lower baud ratesetting.
The number of stations is recognised by every station via a“sign of life” signal.

h

The following applies to fast message transfer:• Set the fastest possible baud rate to suit the network
length and cable cross-section.
• Fewer messages means faster messages.
• Avoid program downloads during the RUN mode.

Signs of life of the individual stations and diagnostics
The inputs and outputs message type is used as a “sign oflife” recognition to ensure that the state of the station canbe recognised by other stations. The states of the inputs andoutputs are sent cyclically and at the set baud rate,irrespective of the SEND IO setting. If the inputs and outputsof a station are not recognised by other stations after a time
determined by the baud rate, the station is deemed to bedisconnected until the next “sign of life” is recognised.

259

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network

Evaluation occurs at the following intervals:
Baud rate

Stations must send a “sign of life” every ...

Stations recognise theabsence of a "sign oflife" signal after

[KB]

[ms]

[ms]

1000

60

180

500

60

180

250

120

360

125

240

720

50

600

1800

20

1500

4500

10

3000

9000

If the absence of a “sign of life” is detected, the respective
diagnostics contact is set to the 1 state.

h260

Diagnostics
contact

Stationnumber

ID 01

1

ID 02

2

ID 03

3

ID 04

4

ID 05

5

ID 06

6

ID 07

7

ID 08

8

If a station does not send a “sign of life” signal (station
not available, NET interrupted), the respective diagnostics
contact ID .. is activated.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Configuration of the easy-NET
network

Attention!
If the states of the inputs, outputs or data are required bya station without fail, the respective diagnostics contact
should be evaluated and the information applied inaccordance with its respective application.
If the respective diagnostics contacts are not evaluated, it
may cause faults in your application.

h

The data to be read from a faulty station is set to the 0state after the fault is detected.

261

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy-NET network

Network transmission security
easy-NET is a CAN-based network. CAN is used in cars andcommercial vehicles in all areas. The same fault recognition
capability with data transfer applies as with CAN. A BOSCH
study relating to undiscovered and corrupt messages
determined the following:
The probability of non-discovery of a corrupted message(residual error probability) is: < 10–10 message error rate.
The message error rate depends on:• Bus loading• Telegram length• Malfunction frequency• Number of stations
Example:Network with:• 500 KBaud• average bus load 25 %• average operating time 2000 h/year• average error rate of 10–3,
i.e.: 1 message is faulty every 1000
• transmission of 1.12 x 1010 messages per year of which
1.12 x 107 messages are faulty• residual error probability: r < 10–10 x 10–3 = 10–13
This means: one of 1013 messages is so corrupt that the fault
cannot be recognised as such. For a network, thiscorresponds to a working time of approx. 1000 years.

262

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

6

easy Settings

Settings can only be carried out on easy models provided
with buttons and LCD display.
EASY-SOFT -PRO can be used to set all models via thesoftware.

Password protection

The easy can be protected by a password against
unauthorised access.
In this case the password consists of a value between
000001 and 999999. The number combination 000000 is
used to delete a password.
Password protection inhibits access to selected areas. The
System menu is always protected by an activated password.
The password can protect the following inputs and areas:• Start or modification of the program• Transfer of a circuit diagram to or from a memory card
(Display variants).
• Change of the RUN or STOP mode.
• Calling and modification of function block parameters• All settings of the real-time clock.
• Modifications of all system parameters.
• Communication with the individual device. (looping toother devices possible.)• Switching off the password delete function.

h

A password that has been entered in easy is transferred tothe memory card together with the circuit diagram,irrespective of whether it was activated or not.
If this easy circuit diagram is loaded back from the memory
card, the password will also be transferred to easy and isactivated immediately.

263

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Password setup
A password can be set via the System menu regardless of the
RUN or STOP modes. You cannot change to the Systemmenu if a password is already activated.
X Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
X Select the menu option SECURITY… to enter the

password.
X Press the OK button and change over to the
PASSWORD… menu.
X If you press the OK button again, you will access the
password input.
ENTER PASSWORD
â-----

If no password has been entered, easy changes directly tothe password display and displays six dashes: No password
available.
X Press OK, six zeros will appear
X Set the password using the cursor buttons:– ú í select position in password,– ÍÚ set a value between 0 to 9.

ENTER PASSWORD
000042

X Save the new password by pressing OK.

Use OK to exit the password display and proceed with ESC
and Ú to the RANGE… menu.
The scope of the password has not yet been considered. The
password is now valid but not yet activated.

264

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Password protection

Selecting the scope of the password
X Press the OK button.

CIRCUIT
DIAGRAMPARAMETERS

X Select the function to be protected or the menu.

åÆ

X Press the OK button in order to protect the function ormenu (tick = protected).

TIME

OPERATING
MODE

æ

h

Standard protection encompasses the programs andcircuit diagram.
At least one function or menu must be protected.
• CIRCUIT DIAGRAM: The password is effective on the
program with circuit diagram and non-enabled function
blocks.
• PARAMETERS: The PARAMETERS menu is protected.
• TIME: Date and time are protected with the password.
• OPERATING MODE: The toggling of the RUN or STOP
operating mode is protected.
• INTERFACE: The interface is inhibited for access to aconnected device. Programs or commands to otherdevices connected via the NET network are routed further.
• DELETE FUNCTION: After four failed attempts to enter apassword, the “DELETE FUNCTION?” prompt appears.
This prompt is not displayed if selected. However, it is nolonger possible to make changes in protected areas if you
forget the password.

265

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Activating the password
You can activate an existing password in three different
ways:• automatically when easy is switched on again,• automatically after a protected circuit diagram is loaded• automatically if a telegram has not been sent on the PC
interface 30 minutes after unlocking the device (using
EASY-SOFT (-PRO),• via the password menu
X Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
X Open the password menu via the menu option

SECURITY…
easy will only show this password menu if a password ispresent.

CHANGE PW
ACTIVATEh

Make a note of the password before you activate it. If thepassword is no longer known, easy can be unlocked(DELETE FUNCTION is not active), however, the circuit
diagram and data settings will be lost.
Attention!
If the password is unknown or lost, and the delete
password function is deactivated: The unit can only bereset to the factory setting by the manufacturer. The
program and all data are lost.
X Select ACTIVATE PW and confirm with OK.

The password is now active. easy will automatically return to
the Status display.
You must unlock easy with the password before you
implement a protected function, enter a protected menu or
the System menu.
266

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Password protection

Unlocking easy
Unlocking easy will deactivate the password. You canreactivate password protection later via the password menu
or by switching the power supply off and on again.
X Press OK to switch to the main menu.
PASSWORD...
STOP

RUN

PASSWORD...

The PASSWORD… entry will flash.
å

X Press OK to enter the password entry menu.

SET CLOCKh
ENTER PASSWORDXXXXXX

If easy shows PROGRAM… in the main menu instead of
PASSWORD…, this means that there is no password
protection active.
easy will display the password entry field.
X Set the password using the cursor buttons.
X Confirm with OK.

If the password is correct, easy will return automatically to
the Status display.
PROGRAM...

The PROGRAM… menu option is now accessible so that you
can edit your circuit diagram.

PARAMETERS

The System menu is also accessible.

STOP

SET CLOCK267

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Changing or deleting the password range
X Unlock easy.
X Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
X Open the password menu via the menu option

SECURITY… and PASSWORD….
CHANGE PW

ACTIVATE PWENTER PASSWORDXXXXXXENTER PASSWORD
100005The CHANGE PW entry will flash.
easy will only show this password menu if a password ispresent.

X Press OK to enter the password entry menu.
X Use OK to move to the 6-digit entry field.
X The current password will be displayed.

X Modify the six password digits using the cursor buttons.
X Confirm with OK.

Use ESC to exit the security area.
ENTER PASSWORD------

268

Deleting
Use number combination 000000 to delete a password.
If a password has not been entered already, easy will show
six dashes:08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Password protection

Password incorrect or no longer known
If you no longer know the exact password, you can try to reenter the password several times.

h
ENTER PASSWORDXXXXXX

DELETE FUNCTION has not been deactivated.
You have entered an incorrect password?
X Re-enter the password.

After the fourth entry attempt easy will ask whether you
wish to delete the circuit diagram and data.

DELETE ALL?

X Press– ESC: No data will be deleted.
– OK: Circuit diagram, data and password are deleted.
easy will return to the Status display.

h

If you no longer know the exact password, you can press
OK to unlock the protected easy. The saved circuit
diagram and all function relay parameters will be lost.
Pressing ESC will retain the circuit diagram and data. You
can then make another four attempts to enter the password.

269

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Changing the menu
languageeasy800 provides ten menu languages which are set as
required via the System menu.

hLanguage

Display

EnglishENGLISH

DeutschDEUTSCH

French

FRANCAIS

SpanishESPANOL

ItalianITALIANO

Portuguese

PORTUGUES

Dutch

NEDERLANDS

SwedishSVENSKA

PolishPOLSKI

TurkishTURKCE

Language selection is only possible if easy is not
password-protected.
X Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
X Select MENU LANGUAGE… to change the menu

language.
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANCAISESPANOLITALIANOPORTUGUESNEDERLANDSVENSKA
POLSKITURKCE

270

Æ

å

æ

The language selection for the first entry ENGLISH isdisplayed.
X Use Í or Ú to select the new menu language, e.g. Italian(ITALIANO).
X Confirm with OK. ITALIANO is assigned with a tick.
X Exit the menu with ESC.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Changing parameters

easy will now show the new menu language.

SICUREZZA...
SISTEMA...

Press ESC to return to the Status display.

LINGUA MENU...

CONFIGURATORE...

Changing parameters

easy allows you to change function relay parameters such as
timing relay setpoint values and counter setpoints without
having to call up the circuit diagram. This is possible
regardless of whether easy is running a program or is in
STOP mode.
X Press OK to switch to the main menu.
X Start the parameter display by selecting PARAMETERS.

T 03 Ü
CP08
C 17
L:

1

S

All function blocks are displayed as a list.

+-

The following preconditions must be fulfilled in order for aparameter set to be displayed:+

RUN• A function relay must have been included in the circuit
diagram.
• The PARAMETERS menu must be available.
• The parameter set must have been enabled for access,indicated by the + character at the bottom right of thedisplay.

h

Parameter sets can only be enabled or protected via the
FUNCTION RELAYS menu, or via the circuit diagram withthe “+” enable and with “–” inhibit parameter set
characters.

271

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

T 03 Ü

S>I1 020.030

X Select the required function block with Í or Ú .

+X Press the OK button.

X Scroll with the Í or Ú cursor buttons through the>I3 005.000

constants of the function block inputs.

QV> 012.050

X Change the values for a parameter set:

– With OK in the Entry mode.
– ú í change decimal place– ÍÚ change the value of a decimal place– OK save constants or– ESC Retain previous setting.
Press ESC to leave the parameter display.

h

Only constants on the function block inputs can bechanged.

Adjustable parameters for function blocks
You can modify the function blocks used in the circuit
diagram in three different ways:• All circuit diagram parameters can be adjusted in STOP
mode via the function block editor.
• Setpoints (constants) can be modified in RUN mode via
the function block editor.
• Setpoints (constants) can be modified via the
PARAMETERS menu.
Adjustable setpoint values are:
• The inputs with all function blocks if constants have beenused.
• Switch on and off times with time switches.
In RUN mode easy operates with a new setpoint as soon as
it has been modified in the parameter display and saved with
OK.

272

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Setting date, time and daylightsaving time

Setting date, time anddaylight saving time

The easy800 devices are equipped with a real-time clockwith date and time functions. The “time switch” function
block can be used to implement time switch applications.
If the clock has not yet been set or if easy is switched on after
the buffer time has elapsed, the clock starts with the setting“WE 1:00 01.05.2002”. The easy clock operates with date
and time so the hour, minute, day, month and year must all
be set.

h

The time, such as: 1:00, indicates the version of the device
operating system.
X Select SET CLOCK… from the main menu.

SET CLOCKThis will open the menu for setting the time.

DST SETTING

X Select SET CLOCK.

HH:MM

X Set the values for day, time, month and year.

DD.MM

YEAR :

00:27
05.05

2002

X Press the OK button to access the Entry mode.

– ú í Move between the parameters– ÍÚ Change the value.
– OK Save day and time
– ESC Retain previous setting.

Press ESC to leave the time setting display.

273

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Changing between winter/ The easy800 models are fitted with a real-time clock. The
summer time (DST)
clock has various possibilities for changing the DST setting.
These are subject to different legal requirements in the EU,
GB and USA.

h

The time change algorithm only applies to the northernhemisphere.
• NONE: no daylight saving time setting• MANUAL: a user defined date for the DST change• EU: date defined by the European Union; Commences: lastSunday in March; Ends: last Sunday in October• GB: date defined in Great Britain; Commences: lastSunday in March; Ends: fourth Sunday in October• US: date defined in the United States of America:
Commences: first Sunday in April; Ends: last Sunday in
October
The following applies to all DST variants:
Winter time h Summer time: On the day of conversion, theclock moves forward one hour at 2:00 to 3:00
Summer time h Winter time: On the day of conversion, theclock moves back one hour at 3:00 to 2:00.
Select SET CLOCK… from the main menu.

SET CLOCKDST SETTING

274

This will open the menu for setting the time.
X Select the DST SETTING menu option.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Changing between winter/summer time (DST)

Selecting DST
easy shows you the options for the DST change.
The standard setting is NONE for automatic DST changeover(Tick at NONE).
NONEMANUAL

å

EU
GB

Æ

æ

US

SUMMERTIME STARTDD.MM

X Select the required variant and press the OK button.

00.00

Manual selection
You want to enter your own date.

SUMMER TIME END
DD.MM: 00:00

h

The following applies to easy800 devices:
The time change algorithm always calculates the datefrom the year 2000. Enter the time change for the year
2000.
X Proceed to the MANUAL menu and press 2 x OK.

– ú í Move between the parameters– ÍÚ Change the value.
– OK Save day and time
– ESC Retain previous setting.

X Press ESC to leave the display.
X Select the day and time at which Summer time is tocommence.
X Select the day and time at which Summer time is to end.

h

The same time for conversion applies as for the legally
determined variants (EU, GB, US).

275

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Activating input delay(debounce)

Input signals can be evaluated by easy with a debounce
delay. This enables, for example, the trouble-free evaluationof switches and push-button actuators subject to contact
bounce.
In many applications, however, very short input signals haveto be monitored. In this case, the debounce function can beswitched off.
X Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.
X Select the SYSTEM menu.

DEBOUNCE å
P BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEP BUTTONSCARD MODE

If easy is password-protected you cannot open the Systemmenu until you have “unlocked” it.

Æ

The input delay (debounce) is set with the DEBOUNCE menu
item.

Æ

Activating debounce
If a tick å is set beside DEBOUNCE, the input delay is set.

æ

DEBOUNCE å
RUN MODEh

If this is not so, proceed as follows:æ

X Select DEBOUNCE and press OK.

Debounce mode will be activated and the display will show
DEBOUNCE å.
Press ESC to return to the Status display.

Deactivating debounce (input delay)
If easy is showing DEBOUNCE in the display, this meansthat Debounce mode has already been deactivated.
X Otherwise select DEBOUNCE å and press OK.

Debounce mode will be deactivated and the display willshow DEBOUNCE.

276

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Activating and deactivating
the P buttonshHow easy input and output signals are processedinternally is explained in Section “Delay times for inputs
and outputs”, from Page 292.

Activating andEven though the cursor buttons (P buttons) have been set as
deactivating the P buttons push-button actuator inputs in the circuit diagram, thisfunction is not activated automatically. This prevents any
unauthorised use of the cursor buttons. The P buttons can be
activated in the System menu.

hIf easy is password-protected you cannot open the Systemmenu until you have “unlocked” it.
The P buttons are activated and deactivated via the
P BUTTONS menu.

DEBOUNCE å Æ

X Press DEL and ALT to call up the System menu.

RUN MODEX Move to the cursor to the P BUTTONS menu.

X Select the SYSTEM menu.

P BUTTONSCARD MODE

æ

Activating the P buttons

DEBOUNCE å Æ

If easy is displaying P BUTTONS
P buttons are active.

P BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEæå, this means that the

X Otherwise select P BUTTONS and press OK.

easy changes the display to P BUTTONS
buttons are activated.

å and the P

X Press ESC to return to the Status display.

The P buttons are only active in the Status display and thetext display. In this display you can use the P buttons toactivate inputs in your circuit diagram.

DEBOUNCE å Æ
P BUTTONS å
RUN MODECARD MODEæ

277

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Deactivating the P buttons
X Select P BUTTONSåand press OK.
easy changes the display to P BUTTONS and the P buttons
are deactivated.

hStartup behaviour

The P buttons are automatically deactivated when loadinga circuit diagram from the memory card or via
EASY-SOFT (-PRO) to easy, or when deleting a circuit
diagram in easy.

The startup behaviour is an important aid during thecommissioning phase. The circuit diagram which easy
contains is not as yet fully wired up or the system or machineis in a state which easy is not permitted to control. The
outputs should not be controlled when easy is switched on.

Setting the startup behaviourh

The easy devices without a display can only be started in
RUN mode.
Requirement: easy must contain a valid circuit diagram.
X Switch to the System menu.

hIf easy is protected by a password, the System menu will
not be available until easy is “unlocked” (see a Section“Unlocking easy” from Page 267).
Specify the operating mode which easy must use when the
supply voltage is applied.
Activating RUN modeIf easy displays RUN MODE
å, this means that easy will
start in Run mode when the supply voltage is applied.

278

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Startup behaviour

DEBOUNCE å Æ

X Otherwise select RUN MODE and press OK.

RUN MODEX Press ESC to return to the Status display.

P BUTTONSCARD MODEå

RUN mode is activated.
æ

Deactivating RUN mode
X Select RUN MODE
å and press OK.
The RUN mode function is deactivated.

DEBOUNCE å Æ
P BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEæThe default setting for easy is for RUN MODE to be
displayed. In other words, easy starts in RUN MODE
when the power is switched on.

Startup behaviour

easy starts in STOP
mode
easy starts in RUN
mode

Menu display

RUN MODERUN MODEå

Status of easy after
startupeasy is in STOP modeåeasy is in RUN mode

Behaviour when the circuit diagram is deleted
The setting for the startup behaviour is an easy device
function. When the circuit diagram is deleted, this does not
result in the loss of the setting selected.

Behaviour during upload/download to card or PC
When a valid circuit diagram is transferred from easy to amemory card or the PC or vice versa, the setting is stillretained.

h

The easy devices without a display can only be started in
RUN mode.

279

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Possible faults
easy will not start in RUN mode:• a program is not available in easy.
• you have selected easy startup in STOP MODE (RUN
MODE menu).

Card startup behaviour
The startup behaviour with memory card is for applications
where unskilled personnel change the memory card underno-voltage conditions.
easy only starts in the Run mode if a memory card with avalid program is inserted.
If the program on the memory card is different to theprogram in easy, the program from the card is loaded intoeasy and easy starts in RUN mode.
X Switch to the System menu.

hIf easy is protected by a password, the System menu will
not be available until easy is “unlocked” (see a Section“Unlocking easy” from Page 267).
Activation of card mode
Requirement: RUN MODE is active.
If easy displays CARD MODE
å, this means that when
the power supply is switched on, easy will only start in RUN
mode if a memory card with a valid program has been
inserted.

DEBOUNCEå Æ

X Otherwise select CARD MODE and press OK.
easy will start up with the program on the card.

RUN MODEåX Press ESC to return to the Status display.

P BUTTONSCARD MODE

280

å æ

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Setting LCD contrast andbacklight

Deactivation of card mode
X Select CARD MODE
å and press OK.
The RUN mode function is deactivated.

DEBOUNCE å Æ
P BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEåæ

The easy default setting is for display of the CARD MODE
menu, i.e. easy starts in RUN mode without the memory card
when the power is switched on.

Setting LCD contrast andbacklight

The background illumination of the LCD display can beswitched off. The display contrast can be set to one of fivestages. The display is not required during operation. The
backlight only needs to be active during maintenance
operations or when texts have to be displayed.
If the backlight is switched off, it will switch back on when abutton is pressed. The backlight switches off automatically
60 s after the last button is pressed.
The contrast and backlight settings are implemented as
device settings.
X Switch to the System menu.

h
SECURITYSYSTEM...

If easy is protected by a password, the System menu will
not be available until easy is “unlocked” (see a Section“Unlocking easy” from Page 267).
X Select the SYSTEM menu.

Æ

X Press the OK button.

MENU LANGUAGECONFIGURATOR... æP BUTTONSRUN MODECARD MODEDISPLAY...

Æ

X Use the Ú button to select the DISPLAY menu and press

OK.
æ

281

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

CONTRAST:

0

LIGHTING åCONTRAST:
LIGHTING

CONTRAST:
LIGHTING

CONTRAST:
LIGHTING

X Press the OK button and move to the contrast entry field

+1
å

+1
å

+1
å

CONTRAST:+1CONTRAST:+1

LIGHTING

LIGHTING å

The menus for setting the contrast and backlight are
displayed.

h

Use the Í and Ú cursor buttons to set the contrast to avalue between –2 and +2.
X Enter your setting
X Complete your setting by pressing OK.

The contrast setting will be retained until it is modified.
X Use the cursor buttons Í and Ú to move to the LIGHTINGmenu.
X Press the OK button.
X The backlight is deactivated.

X Press OK if you wish to reactivate the backlight

X The tick å indicates that the backlight has been activated.

easy comes with the following factory setting:
The contrast is set to 0.
The backlight is permanently activated. Menu setting:
LIGHTING

282

å

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Retention

Retention

It is a requirement of system and machine controllers for
operating states or actual values to have retentive settings.
What this means is that the values will be retained safely
even after the supply voltage to a machine or system has
been switched off and are also retained until the next time
the actual value is overwritten.
The following operands and function blocks can be set tooperate retentively:• Markers• Counter function blocks,• Data function blocks and• Timing relays.
Operating hours countereasy800 provides four retentive operating hours counters.
They are always retentive and can only be selectively deletedwith a reset command.
Retentive data volume
200 bytes is the maximum memory range for retentive data
(operating hours counters are not included).
Markers
A user-definable and consistent marker range can be
declared as retentive.
Counters
All C.., CH.. and CI.. function blocks can be operated withretentive actual values.
Data function blocks
A user-definable consistent data function block range canbe operated with retentive actual values.
Timing relays
A user-definable and consistent range for timing relays canbe run with retentive actual values.

283

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Requirements
In order to make data retentive, the relevant markers andfunction blocks must have been declared as retentive.
Attention!
The retentive data is saved every time the power supply isswitched off, and read every time the device is switchedon. The data integrity of the memory is guaranteed for1010 read/write cycles.

Setting retentive behaviour
Requirement:easy must be in STOP mode.
X Switch to the System menu.

hIf easy is protected by a password, the System menu will
not be available until easy is “unlocked” (see a Section“Unlocking easy” from Page 267).
The default setting of easy is for no retentive actual value
data to be selected. When easy is in STOP mode or has beenswitched to a de-energized state, all actual values arecleared.

RUN MODEå Æ

LIGHTINGåCARD MODE
RETENTIONæ

MB 00 -> MB 00 ÆC

00 -> C00

CH 00 -> CH 00 æ
B:200

284

X Switch to STOP mode.
X Switch to the System menu.
X Proceed to the SYSTEM menu and continue to the

RETENTION… menu.
X Press the OK button.

The first screen display is the selection of the marker range.
X ÍÚ Select a range.
X Press OK to access the Entry modes.

– ú í Select a position from/to,– ÍÚ Set a value.
X Save the input from .. to .. with OK.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Retention

Press ESC to exit the input of the retentive ranges.
CI 00 -> CI 00 Æ

Up to six differing ranges can be selected.

DB 00 -> DB 00T

00 -> T

00 æ

B:200

h
MB 01 -> MB 04
C

12 -> C16

CH 00 -> CH 00
CI 00 -> CI 00

DB 01 -> DB 16
T

26 -> TThe display on the lower right B:200 indicates thenumber of free bytes.
Example:MB 01 to MB 04, C 12 to C 16, DB 01 to DB 16, T 26 to T 32
should be retentive.
124 bytes have been assigned to the retentive data range.
76 bytes are still available.

32

B:076

Deleting ranges
Set the ranges to be erased to the values from 00 to 00.
e.g.: MB 00 -> MB 00. The markers are no longer
retentive.

Deleting retentive actual values of markers andfunction blocks
The retentive actual values are cleared if the following isfulfilled (applies only in STOP mode):• When the circuit diagram is transferred from
EASY-SOFT(-PRO) (PC) or from the memory card to easy,
the retentive actual values are reset to 0. This also applies
when there is no program on the memory card. In this casethe old circuit diagram is retained in easy.
• When changing the respective retentive range.
• When the circuit diagram is deleted via the DELETE
PROGRAM menu.

285

easy Settings

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Transferring retentive behaviour
The setting for retentive behaviour is a circuit diagram
setting. In other words, the setting of the retentive menu
may also under certain circumstances be transferred to thememory card or by uploading or downloading from the PC.
Changing the operating mode or the circuit diagram
When the operating mode is changed or the easy circuit
diagram is modified, the retentive data is normally saved
together with their actual values. The actual values of relays
no longer being used are also retained.
Changing the operating modeIf you change from RUN to STOP and then back to RUN, theactual values of the retentive data will be retained.
Modifying theeasy circuit diagram
If a modification is made to the easy circuit diagram, theactual values will be retained.
Changing the startup behaviour in the SYSTEM menu
The retentive actual values are retained in easy regardless ofthe setting.
Modification of the retentive range
If the set retentive ranges are reduced, only the actual values
saved in the range will remain.
If the retentive range is extended, the older data is retained.
The new data is written with the current actual values in
RUN mode.

286

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Displaying device information

Displaying device
information

Device information is provided for service tasks and for
determining the capability of the device concerned.
This function is only available with devices featuring adisplay.
Exception: Terminal mode MFD-Titan.
easy800 enables the display of the following device
information:• AC or DC power supply• T (transistor output) or R (relay output)• C (clock provided)• A (analog output provided)• LCD (display provided)• easy-NET (easy-NET provided)• OS: 1.10.204 (operating system version)• CRC: 25825 (checksum of the operating system).
X Switch to the System menu.

h
SECURITY

X Select the SYSTEM menu.

Æ

SYSTEM...

If easy is protected by a password, the System menu will
not be available until easy is “unlocked” (see a Section“Unlocking easy” from Page 267).

X Press the OK button.

MENU LANGUAGECONFIGURATOR...
CARD MODEDISPLAY...

X Use the Ú button to select the INFORMATION menu andÆ

RETENTION...

INFORMATION...

press OK.
æThis will display all device information.

287

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Settings

Example: EASY822-DC-TC

DC TCA LCD NET
OS : 1.10.208
CRC: 21779

DC RC

Example: EASY819-DC-RC

LCD NETOS : 1.10.208

X Press ESC to leave the display.

CRC: 21779

CARD MODEDISPLAY...

Æ

RETENTION...

INFORMATION...

288

æ08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

7easy Program cycle

Inside easy

In conventional control systems, a relay or contactor control
processes all the circuit connections in parallel. The speedwith which a contactor switches is thus dependent on thecomponents used, and ranges from 15 to 40 ms for relay
pick-up and drop-out.
With easy the circuit diagram is processed with amicroprocessor that simulates the contacts and relays of thecircuit concerned and thus processes all switching
operations considerably faster. Depending on its size, theeasycircuit diagram is processed cyclically every 0.1 to40 ms.
During this time, easy passes through six segments insuccession.
How easy evaluates the circuit diagram:
Circuitconnec
tions
1
2
3
4

Segment
1
I
I
T
P

2

3

4

5

6

01----I 04----HW01Q1--T 06Q1-Ä T 01EN
02----I 03-------------------R Q 02
01---u-----------------------Ä Q 01
01---k

..
I 12---j------------------------Ä Q 08

In the first four segments easy evaluates the contact fields insuccession. easy checks whether contacts are switched inparallel or in series and saves the switching states of allcontact fields.
In the fifth segment, easy assigns the new switching statesto all the coils in one pass.

289

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

The sixth segment is located outside of the circuit diagram.
easy uses this to:
Evaluating function blocks• process the function blocks which are used: the output
data of a function block is updated immediately after
processing. easy processes the function blocks according
to the function block list (a FUNCTION RELAYS menu)
from top to bottom. You can sort the function block list
with EASY-SOFT (-PRO) from Version 4.04. You can thenfor example, use the results consecutively.
• to establish contact to the “outside world”: The output
relays Q 01 to Q (S).. are switched and the inputs I1 to I
(R).. are read once more.
• easy also copies all the new switching states to the status
image register.
• exchange all data on the easy-NET network (read andwrite).
easy only uses this status image for one cycle. This ensuresthat each circuit connection is evaluated with the same
switching states for one cycle, even if the input signals I1 to
I12 change their status several times within a cycle.

hThe following must be observed when operating a PID
controller function block!
The cycle time of the program must be less than the scantime of the controller. If the cycle time is greater than thecontroller scan time, the controller will not be able toachieve constant results.
Effects on the creation of the circuit diagram
easy evaluates the circuit diagram in these six segments insuccession. You should take into account two factors whencreating your circuit diagram.

290

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

easy Program cycle• The changeover of a relay coil does not change theswitching state of an associated contact until the next
cycle starts.
• Always wire forward or from top to bottom. Never work
backwards.
I 01--u-I 02-..--Ä Q 01
Q 01--kExample: self-latching with own contact
Start condition:
Inputs I1 and I2 are switched on.
Q1 is switched off.
This is the circuit diagram of a self-latching circuit. If I1 andI2 are closed, the switching state of relay coil Ä Q 01 is“latched” via contact Q 01.
• 1st cycle: Inputs I1 and I2 are switched on. Coil Q1 picksup.
• Contact Q 01 remains switched off since easy evaluatesfrom left to right. The first coil field was already passed
when easy refreshes the output image in the 6th segment.
• 2nd cycle: The self-latching now becomes active. easy
has transferred the coil states at the end of the first cycle
to contact Q 01.

I 01----Q 04--oz------kh--------I 03-L: 8 C:2 B:7688

Example: Do not wire backwards
This example is shown in Section “Creating and modifying
connections”Page 106. It was used here to illustrate how
NOT to do it.
In the third rung, easy finds a connection to the second rungin which the first contact field is empty. The output relay is
not switched.

291

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

When wiring more than four contacts in series, use one of
the marker relays.
I 01----Q 04----i 03----I 05---Ä M 01
I 02----I 04----M 01-----------Ä Q 02

Figure 124: Circuit diagram with M 01 marker relay

How easy evaluates the high-speed counters CF, CH
and CI
In order to evaluate the count pulses of 5 kHz, the highspeed counter function blocks operate with an interrupt
routine. The length of the circuit diagram and the associatedcycle time has no effect on the counter result.

Delay times for inputs andoutputs

The time from reading the inputs and outputs to switchingcontacts in the circuit diagram can be set in easy via thedelay time.
This function is useful, for example, in order to ensure aclean switching signal despite contact bounce.

S1

0V

I1

Figure 125: easy input assigned a switch

easy-DC and easy-AC units function with different input
voltages and therefore also have different evaluation
methods and delay times.

292

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Delay times for inputs andoutputs

Delay times with easy-DC basic units
The delay time for DC signals is 20 ms.
1
S1
0
1
B

B
0

C

A

Figure 126: Delay times for easy-DC

An input signal S1 must therefore be 15 V or 8 V for at least
20 ms on the input terminal before the switch contact willchange from 0 to 1 (A). If applicable, this time must also
include the cycle time (B) since easy does not detect thesignal until the start of a cycle.
The same debounce delay (C) applies when the signal drops
out from 1 to 0.

h

If you use high-speed counter function blocks, thedebounce delay time for the inputs is 0.025 ms. Otherwise
it is not possible to count high-speed signals.
If the debounce is switched off, easy responds to an input
signal after just 0.25 ms.
1
S1
0
1

B

B

0
A

C

Figure 127: Switching behaviour with input debounce disabled293

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

Typical delay times with the debounce delay disabled are:• On-delay for– I1 to I4: 0.025 ms– I5 to I12: 0,25 ms (DC)• Off-delay for– I1 to I4: 0.025 ms– I5, I6 and I9 to I10: 0.4 ms– I7, I8, I11 and I12: 0.2 ms (DC),hEnsure that input signals are noise-free if the input
debounce is disabled. easy will even react to very short
signals.

Delay time with easy AC basic units
The input debounce with AC voltage signals depends on thefrequency:• On-delay– 80 ms at 50 Hz, 66 ms at 60 Hz• Off-delay for– I1 to I6 and I9 to I12: 80 ms (66 ms)– I7 and I8: 120 ms (100 ms) with EASY412-AC
The corresponding values for 60 Hz are given in brackets.

294

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Delay times for inputs andoutputs

Behaviour with and without delay time
S1
1

2

1

A

2

B

Figure 128: On-delay for easy-AC

If the debounce delay is switched on, easy checks at 40 ms(33 ms) intervals whether there is a half-wave present at an
input terminal (1st and 2nd pulses in A). If easy detects twopulses in succession, the device switches on thecorresponding input internally.
If this is not the case, the input is switched off again as soon
as easy does not detect two successive half-waves (1st and2nd pulses in B).
S1
1

1

A

1

2

B

Figure 129: Push-button with bounce

If a button or switch bounces (A), the delay time may be
extended by 40 ms (33 ms) (A).
If the debounce delay is switched off, the delay time is
reduced.
• On-delay
20 ms (16,6 ms)• Off-delay for
I1 to I6 and I9 to I12: 20 ms (16.6 ms)• Off-delay I7 and I8: 20 ms (16.6 ms) with EASY412-AC..
295

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

S1
1

1

A

B

Figure 130: On and off delays

easy switches the contact as soon as it detects a pulse (A). If
no pulse is detected, easy switches off the contact (B).

h296

The procedure for changing the delay times is described in
Section “Delay times for inputs and outputs” on
Page 292.

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Monitoring of short-circuit/overload with EASY..-D.-T..

Monitoring of shortcircuit/overload with
EASY..-D.-T..

Depending on the type of easy in use, it is possible to use theinternal inputs I15 and I16, R15, R16 to monitor for shortcircuits or overloads on an output.
• EASY82 .-D.-T..:– I16: Group fault signal for outputs Q1 to Q4.
– I15: Group fault signal for outputs Q5 to Q8.
• EASY620-D.-TE:– R16: Group fault signal for outputs S1 to S4.
– R16: Group fault signal for outputs S5 to S8.
State

h

Outputs

I15 or I16, R15 or R16

No fault found

0 = switched off (make contact)

At least one output has afault

1 = switched on (make contact)

I15 and I16 can only be edited with easy versions whichhave transistor outputs.
The following examples are for I16 = Q1 to Q4.I15 indicatesin the same way short-circuits and overloads on Q5 to Q8.
Example 1: Output with fault indication
I 01----m 16-------------------Ä Q 01
I 16--------------------------S M 16

Figure 131: Circuit diagram for fault output via I16

The above circuit diagram functions as follows:
If a transistor output reports a fault, M16 is set by I16. The
break contact of M16 switches off output Q1. M16 can becleared by resetting the easy power supply.

297

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

Example 2: Output of operating state
I 01----m 16-------------------Ä Q 01
I 16---------------------------S M 16
M 16---------------------------Ä Q 04

Figure 132: Output of operating state

The above circuit operates as described in example 1. The
signal light is triggered at Q4 for additional overload
monitoring. If Q4 has an overload, it would “pulse”.
Example 3: Automatic reset of error signal
I
I
M
T
M

01----m 16-------------------Ä
16---------------------------S
16---------------------------Ä
08---------------------------R
16---------------------------Ä

Q
M
T
M
Q

01
16
08EN
16
04

Figure 133: Automatic reset of error signal

The above circuit diagram functions in the same way as
Example 2. In addition the marker M16 is reset every 60
seconds by timing relay T08 (on-delayed, 60 s). Should I16
remain at 1, M16 will continue to be set. Q1 is set briefly to
1 until I16 switches off again.

298

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Expanding easy800

Expanding easy800

You can expand easy800 with easy models EASY618-..-RE ,EASY620-D.-TE, EASY202-RE locally or use the
EASY200-EASY coupling module for remote expansion witheasy600 expansion. All available bus interface devices such
as EASY204-DP, EASY221-CN, EASY205-ASI or EASY222DN can be used if present.
Install the units and connect the inputs and outputs as
described (see a Section “Connecting the expansion
device”Page 34).
You process the inputs of the expansion devices as contacts
in the easy circuit diagram in the same way as you process
the inputs of the basic unit. The input contacts are assigned
the operand designations R1 to R12.
R15 and R16 are the group fault inputs of the transistor
expansion unit (a Section “Monitoring of short-circuit/overload with EASY..-D.-T..”, Page 297).
The outputs are processed as relay coils or contacts like theoutputs in the basic unit. The output relays are S1 to S8.

h

EASY618-..-RE provides the outputs S1 to S6. The other
outputs S7, S8 can be used internally.

How is an expansion unit recognised?
If at least one R .. contact or S .. coil/contact is usedin the circuit diagram, the basic unit assumes that an
expansion device is connected.

299

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

Transfer behaviour
The input and output data of the expansion units istransferred serially in both directions. Take into account themodified reaction times of the inputs and outputs of the
expansion units:
Input and output reaction times of expansion units
The debounce setting has no effect on the expansion unit.
Transfer times for input and output signals:• Local expansion– Time for inputs R1 to R12: 30 ms + 1 cycle– Time for outputs S1 to S6 (S8): 15 ms + 1 cycle• Decentralised (remote) expansion– Time for inputs R1 to R12: 80 ms + 1 cycle– Time for outputs S1 to S6 (S8): 40 ms + 1 cycle

Function monitoring of expansion units
If the power supply of the expansion unit is not present, noconnection can be established between it and the basic unit.
The expansion inputs R1 to R12, R15, R16 are incorrectly
processed in the basic unit and show status 0. It cannot be
assured that the outputs S1 to S8 are transferred to the
expansion unit.
Warning!
Continuously monitor the functionality of the easy
expansion in order to prevent switching errors in themachine or plant.
The status of the internal input I14 of the basic unit indicatesthe status of the expansion unit:• I14 = “0”: expansion unit is functional• I14 = “1”: expansion unit is not functional300

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Expanding easy800

ExamplePower can be applied to the expansion unit later than thebasic unit. This means that the basic unit is switched to RUN
when the expansion unit is absent. The following easy circuit
diagram detects if the expansion unit is functional or not
functional.
I 14----m 01-------------------Ä : 08------------------------------S M 01
I 14--------------------------Ä : 08
I 01--u-I 02------------------Ä Q 01
Q 01--kFigure 134: Circuit diagram for expansion testing

As long as I 14 is 1, the remaining circuit diagram is skipped.
If I 14 is 0, the circuit diagram is processed. If the expansion
unit drops out for any reason, the circuit diagram is skipped.
M 01 detects whether the circuit diagram was processed forat least one cycle after the power supply is switched on. If
the circuit diagram is skipped, all the outputs retain theirprevious state.

301

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

QA analog output

The analog output operates with decimal values between 0
and 1023. This corresponds to a 10-bit resolution. At theoutput this corresponds to a physical voltage between 0 V
and 10 V DC.
Negative values such as: –512 are evaluated as zero andoutput as 0 V DC.
Positive values greater than 1023, such as: 2047, areevaluated as 1023 and output as 10 V DC.

Behaviour with assignment of values exceeding 1023
Warning!
Valid for operating system versions up to 1.02.154: If ananalog output is assigned with a value greater than 1023,
a physical value is output which is calculated using thefollowing formula. The result can cause sudden steps on
the analog output.
Formula for calculation of the physical value:
Y = X – 1023 x n
Y = physical value
X = value which is assigned to the QA operands
n = factor which defines the frequency of occurrence of the1023 as a whole number in “X”.

10 V

0

1023

2047

Figure 135: Step behaviour on analog output QA302

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Loading and saving programs

ExampleX = 1539; r n = 1
Y = 1539 – 1023 x 1
Y = 515
QA =

10 V
1023

x 515

QA = 5.03 V

Loading and saving
programs

You can either use the easy interface to save programs to amemory card or use EASY-SOFT(-PRO) and a transmission
cable to transfer them to a PC.

EASY…-..-..XMFD without display and keypad
easy models without buttons and a display can be loadedwith the easy program via EASY-SOFT-PRO or automaticallyfrom the fitted memory card every time the power supply isswitched on.

Program compatibility of the hardware
All programs, even if functions are not supported by the
hardware can be loaded on an easy800 device.
Example: a program with analog value comparators is
loaded on an AC version. The analog value comparator
works with the value zero.

303

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

Interface
The easy interface is covered. Remove the cover carefully.

Figure 136: Remove cover and plug-in
X To close the slot again, push the cover back onto the slot.

COM connection
This function is available from device version 04.
easy800 supports the COM connection via the serialinterface.

Terminal modeThis function is available from device version 04.
easy800 supports terminal mode via the serial interface or
via easy-NET.

304

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Loading and saving programs

Memory card
The card is available as an accessory EASY-M-256K for
easy800.
Circuit diagrams containing all the relevant data can betransferred from the EASY-M-256K memory to easy800.
Each memory card can hold one easy circuit diagram.
Information stored on the memory card is “non-volatile”
and thus you can use the card to archive, transfer and copy
your circuit diagram.
On the memory card you can save:• the program• all parameter settings of the circuit diagram,• all display texts with functions– the system settings,– Debounce,– P Buttons,– Password,– retention on/off and range,– easy-NET configuration,– Card mode.

hMemory cards that are created with an easy device version
F 03 can be read with device versions > 03.
Memory cards that are created with a device version > 03
can also only be read with device versions > 03.
X Insert the memory card in the open interface slot.

305

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

Figure 137: Fitting and removing the memory cardhWith easy you can insert and remove the memory cardeven if the power supply is switched on, without the riskof losing data.
Loading or saving circuit diagram
You can only transfer circuit diagrams in STOP mode.
The easy variants without keyboard and LCD automaticallytransfer the circuit diagram from the memory card to the
EASY…-..-..X when the supply voltage is applied, if amemory card is inserted. If the memory card contains aninvalid circuit diagram, the circuit-diagram installed in theeasy is retained.

PROGRAMX Switch to STOP mode.

CARD

X Select the CARD… menu option.

DELETE PROG

X Select PROGRAM… from the main menu.

The CARD… menu option will only appear if you haveinserted a functional memory card.

306

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Loading and saving programs

You can transfer a circuit diagram from easyto the card andfrom the card to the easy memory or delete the content of
the card.

DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARDh

If the operating voltage fails during communication withthe card, repeat the last procedure since easymay not havetransferred or deleted all the data.
X After transmission, remove the memory card and close thecover.
Saving a circuit diagram on the card
X Select DEVICE-> CARD.

REPLACE ?

X Confirm the prompt with OK to delete the contents of thememory card and replace it with the easy circuit diagram.
Press ESC to cancel.
Loading a circuit diagram from the card
X Select the CARD-> DEVICE menu option.
X Press OK to confirm the prompt if you want to delete theeasymemory and replace it with the card content.

DEVICE-CARD
CARD-DEVICE
DELETE CARD

Press ESC to cancel.
If there are transmission problems, easy will display the
INVALID PROG message.

INVALID PROG

This either means that the memory card is empty or that thecircuit diagram on the card contains function relays that easy
does not recognise.
The “analog comparator” function relay is only used witheasy DC 24 V DC versions.

h

If the memory card is password-protected, the password
will also be transferred to the easy memory and will be
active immediately.

307

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

Deleting a circuit diagram on the card
X Select the DELETE CARD menu option.
X Press OK to confirm the prompt and to delete the card
content.

DELETE ?

Press ESC to cancel.
Memory card compatibility of the programshMemory cards with programs are always read by easy800
devices with the newer (higher) operating system version.
The program is executable. If programs are written with anewer operating system (higher number) on the memory
card, this program can only be read and executed by thesame version or a higher one.

EASY-SOFT (-PRO)
EASY-SOFT (-PRO) is a PC program for creating, testing andmanaging programs and easy circuit diagrams.

h

You should only transfer data between the PC and easyusing the easyPC interface cable, which is available asaccessory EASY800-PC-CAB.

heasy cannot exchange data with the PC while the circuit
diagram display is on screen.
Use EASY-SOFT(-PRO) to transfer circuit diagrams from your
PC to easy and vice versa. Switch easy to RUN mode from the
PC to test the program using the current wiring.
EASY-SOFT (-PRO) provides extensive help on how to use thesoftware.
X Start EASY-SOFT (-PRO) and click on Help.

The on-line help provides all additional information about
EASY-SOFT (-PRO) that you will need.

308

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Loading and saving programs

If there are transmission problems, easy will display the
INVALID PROG message.

INVALID PROG

X Clarify if the circuit diagram uses function relays which theeasy unit does not recognise: The analog value
comparator function relay is only available on the
24 V DC devices easy-DC and easy-DA.

h

If the operating voltage fails during communication with
the PC, repeat the last procedure. It is possible that not all
the data was transferred between the PC and easy.

Figure 138: Fitting and removing EASY800-PC-CAB
X After transmission, remove the cable and close the cover.

309

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Inside easy

Compatibility of different
easy800 versions.

Device compatibility
easy800 is being further developed for you. The neweasy800 devices have more functions than previous devices.
Please note the device version number on the left of thedevice.
e.g.: 039000000607 device version 03
To version 03: easy800 1st edition; up to operating system
1.0x
From version 04: easy800 2nd edition; from operating
system version 1.1xh

The new easy800 devices have all the functions of theprevious devices. All programs of the previous devices canbe run on the new devices of the same type. Old programs
can be transferred directly using the memory card.
The following functions have been added from device
version 04 upwards.
• COM connection with an MFD-Titan,• Terminal mode in conjunction with an MFD-Titan,• BUSY indication in the Status display, PC interface active,• DISPLAY menu, contrast and backlight setting,• INFORMATION menu, information about the device• Zoom in and out of the power flow display,• D text display function block was developed for displaying
all actual values and for inputting constants,• BC block comparison function block,• BT block transfer function block,• DC PID controller function block,• FT PT1 signal smoothing filter function block,• LS value scaling function block,• NC numerical converter function block,• PW pulse width modulation function block,• ST set cycle time function block,• VC value limitation function block.

310

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Device version

Device version

Every easy800 has the device version number printed on theleft of the device housing. The device version is indicated by
the first two digits of the device number.
Example:DC 20.4 …28.8 V
4W
03-9000000607

This device is of device version 03.
The device version provides useful service information about
the hardware version and the version of the operating
system.The device version is important for selecting thecorrect control relay for EASY-SOFT or EASY-SOFT -PRO.

311

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

312

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

AppendixTechnical data

Generaleasy800
easy800
Dimensions W x H x D[mm]

107.5 x 90 x 72

[inches]

4.23 x 3.54 x 2.84

Space units (SU) width

6

Weight
[g]

320

[lb]

0,705

Mounting

Top-hat rail to DIN 50022,
35 mm or screw mounting with 3
ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet313

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

16.25

75

16.25

45

110

90

102

M4

4.5
48.5

107.5

70.5
72

Figure 139: Dimensions easy800 in mm(Stated in inches a Table 9)
Table 9:314

Dimensions in inches

mm

inchesmm

inches

4.5

0.177

75

2.95

16.25

0.64

90

3.54

48.5

1.91

102

4.01

70.5

2.78

107.5

4.23

72

2.83

110

4.33

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

Climatic environmental conditions(Cold to IEC 60068-2-1, Heat to IEC 60068-2-2)
Ambient temperature
Installed horizontally/vertically°C, (°F)

Condensation–25 to 55, (–13 to 131)
Prevent condensation withsuitable measures

LCD display (reliably legible)°C, (°F)

0 to 55, (32 to 131)

Storage/transport temperature°C, (°F)–40 to 70, (–40 to 158)

Relative humidity (IEC 60068-2-30), no moisturecondensation%

5 to 95

Air pressure (operation)hPa

795 to 1080

Ambient mechanical conditions
Pollution degree

2

Degree of protection (EN 50178, IEC 60529, VBG4)

IP20

Oscillations (IEC 60068-2-6)
constant amplitude 0.15 mm

Hz

10 to 57

constant acceleration 2 g

Hz

57 to 150

Shocks (IEC 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15 g/11
ms

Shocks18

Drop (IEC 60068-2-31)

mm

50

m

1

Air dischargekV

8Contact discharge

kV

6

V/m

10

Free fall, when packed (IEC 60068-2-32)

DropheightElectromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Electrostatic discharge (ESD),(IEC/EN 61000-4-2, severity level 3)

Electromagnetic fields (RFI),(IEC/EN 61000-4-3)

Radio interference suppression (EN 55011, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4),limit classB315

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

Burst (IEC/EN 61000-4-4, severity level 3)Power cableskV

2

Signal cables

kV

2High energy pulses (Surge) easy-AC(IEC/EN 61000-4-5), power cable symmetricalkV

2High energy pulses (Surge) easy-DC(IEC/EN 61000-4-5, severity level 2), power cable
symmetrical

kV

0,5

Line-conducted interference (IEC/EN 61000-4-6)

V

10

Dielectric strength
Measurement of the air clearance and creepage distance

EN 50 178, UL 508, CSA
C22.2, No 142

Dielectric strength

EN 50 178

Overvoltage category/degree of pollution

II/2

Tools and cable cross-sections
mm2

0.2 to 4

AWG

22 to 12mm2

0.2 to 2.5

AWG

22 to 12

Factory wiring:

AWG

30

Slot-head screwdriver, widthmm

3.5 x 0.8inch

0.14 x 0.03

Nm

0,6

Solid, minimum to maximum

Flexible with ferrule, minimum to maximum

Tightening torque316

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

Backup/accuracy of real-time clock (only with easy-C)
Clock battery back-up
200
180
160
140
120
a 100
80
60
40
20
0

25˚C
55˚C

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20b

1 backup time in hours
2 service life in years
Accuracy of the real-time clock
Per days/dayg5

Per yearh/year

g 0.5%

g 0.02Range “s”

ms5

Range “M:S”

S

1Range “H:M”

min.

1

Repetition accuracy of timing relays
Accuracy of timing relay (from value)
Resolution

Retentive memory
Read/write cycles of retentive memory

1010

Circuit connections (basic units)
easy800256317

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

Power supply
EASY819-AC-RC..
EASY819-AC-RC..
Rated value (sinusoidal) Ue

V AC, (%)

100/110/115/120/230/240,(+10/–15)

V AC

85 to 264

Hz, (%)

50/60, (g 5)

at 115/120 V AC 60 Hz, typicalmA

70

at 230/240 V AC 50 Hz, typical

mA

35

ms

20

at 115/120 V AC, typicalVA

10

at 230/240 V AC, typical

VA

10

Operating range
Frequency, rated value, tolerance
Input current consumption

Voltage dips, IEC/EN 61131-2
Power loss

EASY8..-DC-…
EASY8..-DC-…
Rated voltage

318

Rated value

V DC, (%)

24, (+20, –15)

Permissible range

V DC

20.4 to 28.8

Residual ripple%

F5

Input current at 24 V DC, typical

mA

140

Voltage dips, IEC/EN 61131-2

ms

10Power loss at 24 V DC, typicalW

3,4

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

InputsEASY8..-AC-…
EASY8..-AC-R..
Digital inputs 115/230 V AC
Number12

Status display

LCD (if provided)

Electrical isolation
To supply voltage

No

Between each otherNo

To the outputs

Yes

to the PC interface, memory card, easy-NET, EASY-LINK

Yes

Rated voltage L (sinusoidal)
0 signal

V AC

0 to 40

1 signal

V AC

79 to 264

Rated frequency

Hz

50/60

at 230 V 50 Hz

mA

10 x 0.5

at 115 V, 60 Hz

mA

10 x 0.25

Input current for state “1” I1 to I6, I9 to I12,319

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

EASY8..-AC-R..
Input current at state “1” I7, I8,
at 230 V 50 Hz

mA

2x6

at 115 V, 60 Hz

mA

2x4

Debounce ON

ms, (Hz)80, (50)
66B/c, (60)

Debounce OFF

ms, (Hz)

20, (50)
16B/c, (60)

Debounce ON

ms, (Hz)

120, (50)100, (60)

Debounce OFF

ms, (Hz)40, (50)33, (60)

Debounce ON

ms, (Hz)80, (50)
66n , (60)

Debounce OFF

ms, (Hz)

20, (50)
16B/c, (60)m

100

I1 to I6, I9 to I12), typical, debounce offm60

I7, I8, typicalm

100

Delay time for 0 to 1 and 1 to 0
for I1 to I6, I9 to I12

Delay time I7, I8 for 1 to 0

Delay time I7, I8 for 0 to 1

Max. permissible cable length (per input)
I1 to I6, I9 to I12), typical, debounce on32008/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

EASY8..-DC-…
EASY8..-DC-…
Digital inputs
Number12

Inputs usable as analog inputs, (I7, I8, I11, I12)

4

Status display

LCD (if provided)

Electrical isolation
To supply voltage

No

Between each otherNo

To the outputs

Yes

to the PC interface, memory card, easy-NET, EASY-LINK

Yes

Rated voltage
Rated value

V DC

24

I1 to I6 and I9 to I10

V DC

<5

I7, I8, I11, I12

V DC

<8

I1 to I6 and I9 to I10

V DC

> 15

I7, I8, I11, I12

V DC

>8

I1 to I6, I9 to I10 at 24 V DC

mA

3,3

I7, I8, I11, I12 at 24 V DC

mA

2,2

ms

20

I1 to I4

ms

0,025

I5, I6, I9, I10

ms

0,25

I7, I8, I11, I12

ms

0,15

0 signal

1 signal

Input current on 1 signal

Delay time for 0 to 1
Debounce ON
Debounce off, typical321

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

EASY8..-DC-…
Delay time for 1 to 0
Debounce ON

ms20

I1 to I4

ms

0,025

I5, I6, I9, I10

ms

0,25

I7, I8, I11, I12

ms

0,15

Cable length (unshielded)m100

Debounce off, typical

High-speed counter inputs, I1 to I4
Number
Cable length (shielded)

4
m

20

kHz

<5

High-speed up and down counters
Counting frequency
Pulse shape

Square wave

Mark-to-space ratio

1:1

Frequency counters
Counting frequency

kHz

<5

Pulse shape

Square wave

Mark-to-space ratio

1:1

Incremental encoder counters
Counting frequency

322

kHz

<3

Pulse shape

Square wave

Counter inputs I1 and I2, I3 and I4

2

Signal offset

90°

Mark to space ratio

1:1

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

EASY8..-DC-…
Analog inputs
Number

4

Electrical isolation
To supply voltage

No

To the digital inputs

No

To the outputs

Yes

To the easy-NET network

Yes

Input type

DC voltage

Signal range

V DC

0 to 10

Resolution analog

V

0,01

Resolution digital

Bit

10

Value

0 to 1023

kO

11,2

2 easy-devices, from actual value%

g3

Within a unit, from actual value, (I7, I8, I11, I12)

%

g2

ms

20

Input impedance
Accuracy

Conversion time, analog/digital
Debounce ON:
Debounce OFF:

Each cycle time

Input current

mA<1

Cable length (shielded)

m

30

323

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

Relay outputs
EASY8..-..-R..
EASY8..-..-R..
Number6

Type of outputs

Relays

In groups of1

Connection of outputs in parallel to increase the output

Not permissible

Protection for an output relay
Miniature circuit-breaker B16

A16

or fuse (slow-blow)

A

8

Potential isolation to mains power supply, input, PC interface, memory
card, NET network, EASY-LINK

Yes

Safe isolation

V AC

300

Basic insulation

V AC

600

Switchoperations

10 x 106

Conventional thermal current, (UL)A

8, (10)Recommended for load at 12 V AC/DC

mA

> 500

Protected against short-circuit cos v = 1
16 A characteristic B (B16) at

A

600

Protected against short-circuit cos v = 0.5 to 0.7
16 A characteristic B (B16) at

A

900

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp contact coilkV

6

Rated operational voltage Ue

V AC

250

Safe isolation to EN 50178 between coil and contact

V AC

300

Safe isolation to EN 50178 between two contacts

V AC

300

Mechanical lifespanContacts relays

Rated insulation voltage Ui

324

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

EASY8..-..-R..
Making capacity, IEC 60947
AC-15 250 V AC, 3 A (600 Ops/h)

Switchoperations

300000DC-13 L/R F 150 ms 24 V DC, 1 A (500 Ops/h)

Switchoperations

200000AC-15 250 V AC, 3 A (600 Ops/h)

Switchoperations

300000DC-13 L/R F 150 ms 24 V DC, 1 A (500 Ops/h)

Switchoperations

2000001000 W at 230/240 V AC

Switchoperations

25000

500 W at 115/120 V AC

Switchoperations

25000

Fluorescent tube with ballast, 10 x 58 W at 230/240 V
AC

Switchoperations

25000

Conventional fluorescent tube, compensated,
1 x 58 W at 230/240 V AC

Switchoperations

25000

Conventional fluorescent tube, uncompensated,
10 x 58 W at 230/240 V AC

Switchoperations

25000

Mechanical switch operations

Switchoperations

10 mill. (107)

Mechanical switching frequency

Hz

10

Resistive lamp load

Hz

2

Inductive load

Hz

0,5

Breaking capacity, IEC 60947

Filament lamp load

Operating frequency, relays325

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

UL/CSA
Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC/24 V DC
AC

DC

A

Control Circuit Rating Codes (utilisation category)

10/8
B300 Light Pilot Duty

Max. rated operational voltage

V AC

300

Max. thermal uninterrupted current cos v = 1 at B300

A

5Maximum make/break capacity cos v k 1 (Make/break)at B300

VA

3600/360

Control Circuit Rating Codes (utilisation category)

R300 Light Pilot Duty

Max. rated operational voltage

V DC

300

Max. thermal uninterrupted current at R300

A

1

Maximum make/break capacity at R300

VA

28/28

Transistor outputs
EASY8..-D.-T..
EASY8..-DC-T..
Number of outputs

8

Contacts

Semiconductors

Rated voltage Ue

V DC

24

Permissible range

V DC

20.4 to 28.8

Residual ripple%

F5

at 0 state, typical/maximum

mA

18/32

at 1 state, typical/maximum

mA

24/44

Supply current

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Attention!
If voltage is applied to the outputs when the polarity of the power supply
is reversed, this will result in a short circuit.

326

Potential isolation to the inputs, supply voltage, PC interface, memory
card, NET network, EASY-Link

Yes

Rated current Ie at state 1, maximum

0,5A08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

EASY8..-DC-T..
Lamp load
Q1 to Q4 without RVW

3

Q5 to Q8 without RV

W

5

mA

< 0.1

V

2,5

Residual current at state “0” per channel
Max. output voltage
On 0 state with external load, 10 MO
On 1 state, Ie = 0.5 A

U = Ue – 1 V

Short-circuit protection
Thermal (Q1 to Q4)(evaluation with diagnostics inputs I16, I15)

Yes

Short-circuit tripping current for Ra F 10 mO(depending on number of active channels and their
load)

A

0.7 F Ie F 2

Maximum total short-circuit current

A

8

Peak short-circuit current

A

16

Thermal cutout
Maximum switching frequency with constant resistive
load RL = 100 kO (depends on program and load)

Yes
Switchoperations/hParallel connection of outputs with resistive load; inductive load withexternal suppression circuit (a Section “Connecting transistor outputs”,
Page 53); combination within a group

40000

Yes

Group 1: Q1 to Q4
Group 2: Q5 to Q8
Maximum number of outputs
Total maximum current

4
A

2

Attention!
Outputs must be actuated simultaneously and for thesame time duration.
Status display of the outputs

LCD display (ifprovided)327

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

Inductive load without external suppressor circuit
General explanations:
T0.95 = time in milliseconds until 95 % of the stationary
current is reachedT0.95 Q 3 x T0.65 = 3 x

LR

Utilisation category in groups for• Q1 to Q4, Q5 to Q8
T0.95 = 1 ms
R = 48 O
L = 16 mH

DC13
T0.95 = 72 ms
R = 48 O
L = 1.15 H

328

Utilisation factor per group g =0,25Relative duty factor%

100

Max. switching frequency
f = 0.5 Hz
Max. duty factor
DF = 50 %Switchoperations/h

1500

0,25

Utilisation factor g =Relative duty factor%

100

Max. switching frequency
f = 0.5 Hz
Max. duty factor
DF = 50 %Switchoperations/h

1500

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

Other inductive loads:
T0.95 = 15 ms
R = 48 O
L = 0.24 H

Utilisation factor g =0,25

Relative duty factor%

100

Max. switching frequency
f = 0.5 Hz
Max. duty factor
DF = 50 %Switchoperations/h

1500

Inductive loading with external suppressor circuit for each load(a Section “Connecting transistor outputs”, Page 53)
Utilisation factor g =1

Relative duty factor%

100

Max. switching frequency
Max. duty factor

Switchoperations/h

Depends on the
suppressor
circuit

Analog output
EASY8..-D.-T..
EASY8..-DC-T..
Number

1

Electrical isolation
To power supply

No

To the digital inputs

No

To the digital outputs

Yes

To the easy-NET network

Yes

Output type:

DC voltage

Signal range

V DC

0 to 10Output current max.

mA

10

Load resistor

kO

1

Short-circuit and overload proof

Yes

329

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

EASY8..-DC-T..
Resolution analog

V DC

0,01

Resolution digital

Bit

10

Value

0 to 1023

Transient recovery time

µs

100

Accuracy (–25 to 55 °C), related to the range%

2

Accuracy (25 °C), related to the range%

1

Conversion timeeach CPU cycle

easy-NET Network
EASY8..-..-…
EASY8..-..-…
Number of stations
Bus length/transmission speed1)

8
m/kBaud

6/100025/50040/250125/125300/50700/201000/10
Yes

Electrical isolation
To power supply, inputs, outputs, EASY-LINK, PC interface, memory
moduleBus termination (a accessories)

Yes

First and last station
Plug connector (a accessories)
Type

330

poles

8
RJ45

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Technical data

EASY8..-..-…
Cable cross-sections, with cable lengths and cable resistance/m
Cross-section up to 1000 m, < 16 mO/m

mm2 (AWG)

1.5 (16)

Cross-section up to 600 m, < 26 mO/m

mm2 (AWG)

0.75 to 0.8 (18)

Cross-section up to 400, < 40 mO/m

mm2 (AWG)

0.5 to 0.6 (20, 19)

Cross-section up to 250, < 60 mO/m

mm2 (AWG)

0.34 to 0.5 (22, 21, 20)

Cross-section up to 175, < 70 mO/m

mm2 (AWG)

0.25 to 0.34 (23, 22)

Cross-section up to 40, < 140 mO/m

mm2 (AWG)

0.13 (26)Bus lengths above 40 m can only be achieved with cables with reinforced cross-section and connection
adapter.
Surge impedance: 120 O.

331

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

List of the function blocks

332

Function blocks

Element

Meaning ofabbreviation

Function block designation

Page

from
V.04

A

Analog value comparator

Analog value comparator

125

AR

Arithmetic

Arithmetic

128

BC

block compare

Data block compare

132

x

BT

block transfer

Data block transfer

139

x

BV

Boolean operation

Boolean sequence

150

C

counterCounter153

CFcounter frequency

Frequency counter

160

CH

counter high-speed

High-speed counters

164

CI

counter fast incremental
value encoder

High-speed incremental encoder

170

CP

comparators

Comparators

175

D

display

Text function block

177

DB

data block

Data function block

181

DC

DDC controller (direct
digital control)

PID controllers

183

x

FT

filter

PT1 signal smoothing filter

189

x

GT

GET

GET network

183

HW

hora(lat) week

Seven day timer

194

HY

hora(lat) year

Twelve month timer

200

LS

linear scaling

Value scaling

204

MR

master reset

Master reset

211

NC

numeric coding

Numerical converters

212

OT

operating time

Operating hours counter

218

PT

PUT

PUT network

219

PW

pulse width modulation

Pulse width modulation

216

SC

synchronize clocks

Synchronise clock via network

224

x

x

x

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

List of the function blocks

Element

Meaning ofabbreviation

Function block designation

Page

from
V.04

ST

set time

Set cycle time

221

x

T

timing relays

Timing relays

228

VC

value capsuling

Value limitation

241

Jumps

203

:

x

Function block coils
Coil

Meaning of abbreviation

DescriptionC_

count input

Counter input

D_

direction input

Count up/down indicatorEDenable Differential component

Activate differential component

EI

enable integral component

Activate integral componentENenableEnable moduleEP

enable proportional component

Activate proportional component

RE

reset

Reset actual value to zeroSE

set enable

Set to a predefined value

ST

stop

STOP block processing

T_

trigger

Trigger coil333

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

Function block contacts

334

Contact

Meaning of abbreviation

Description

CY

carry

Status “1”, if the value range is exceeded; (carry)E1error 1

Error 1, dependent on function blockE2

error 2Error 2, dependent on function blockE3

error 3

Error 3, dependent on function block

EQ

equal

Comparison result, status 1 if values equal.

FB

fall below

Status “1”, if the actual value is less than or equal
to the lower setpoint value;GTgreater than

Status 1 if the value at I1 > I2;

LI

limit indicator

Value range manipulated variable exceededLTless than

Status 1 if the value at I1 < I2;

OF

overflow

Status “1”, if the actual value is greater than orequal to the upper setpoint value;

Q1

output (Q1)

Switch output

QV

output value

Current actual value of the function block (e.g.
counter value);

ZE

zero

Status “1”, if the value of the element input QV isequal to zero;08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

List of the function blocks

Function block inputs (constants, operands)
Input

Meaning of abbreviation

Description

F1

Factor 1

Gain factor for I1 (I1 = F1 x Value)

F2

Factor 2

Gain factor for I2 (I2 = F2 x Value)

HY

Hysteresis

Switching hysteresis for value I2 (Value HY applies
to positive and negative hysteresis.)

I1

Input 1

1st input word

I2

Input 2

2nd input word

KP

Standard

Proportional gainME

Minimum make time

Minimum make timeMV

manual value

Manual manipulated variableNO

numbers of elements

Number of elements

OS

OffsetOffset for the value I1PD

Period duration

Period duration

SH

Setpoint highUpper limit valueSL

Setpoint low

Lower limit valueSV

Set value

Defined actual value (Preset)

TC

Scan timeTG

Recovery timeTN

Standard

Rate timeTVStandard

Reset time

X1

X1, interpolation point 1
abscissa

Lower value of source range

X2

Interpolation point 2 abscissa

Upper value of source range

Y1

Interpolation point 1 ordinate

Lower value of target range

Y2

Interpolation point 2 ordinate

Upper value of target range335

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Appendix

Function block output (operands)
Input

Meaning of abbreviation

Description

QV

Output value

Output value

Other operands

336

Other
operands

Description

MB

Marker byte (8-bit value)IA

Analog input (if available on device!)

MW

Marker word (16-bit value)

QA

Analog output (if available on device!)

MD

Marker double word (32-bit value)

NU

Constant (number), value range from–2147483648 to +2147483647

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Memory spacerequirement

Memory space requirement

The following table provides an overview of the memory
requirement of the easy800 circuit connections, function
blocks and their respective constants:
Space requirement per
circuit conn./function block

Space requirement per
constant on the function
block input

Byte

Byte

20

–

A

68

4

AR

40

4

BC

48

4

BT

48

4

BV

40

4

C

52

4

CF

40

4

CH

52

4

CI

52

4

CP

32

4

D

160

DC

96

4

DB

36

4

FT

56

4

GT

28

HW

68

4 (per channel)

HY68

4 (per channel)

LS

64

4

MR

20

NC

32

Circuit connection
Function blocks

4337

08/04 AWB2528-1423GBSpace requirement per
circuit conn./function block

Space requirement per
constant on the function
block input

Byte

Byte

OT

36

4

PT

36

4

PW

48

4

SC

20

ST

24

4

T

48

4

VC

40

4

:

–

–

Optimization of the memory space requirement
If, for example, you are implementing a project with several
easy800 devices in which station “1” uses 32 text elements
and you intend to introduce further functions or elements, it
is recommended that the expansion of the circuit diagram is
distributed on the individual intelligent easy800 devices on
the easy-NET, and that the relevant information is
exchanged between the individual stations via the NET.
Advantages:• faster programs,• commissioning becomes easier to handle (by distributed
intelligence),• Straightforward configuration of the easy-NET using
EASY-SOFT (-PRO).

338

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Index

A

Actual values .....................................................124
Add
Circuit connections .......................................72
Contact type .................................................71

B

Break contact ......................................................88
Inverting .....................................................106
Bus termination resistor .......................................57
Button
ALT ..............................................................72
DEL ..............................................................72
OK ..........................................................69, 86
Buttons ...............................................................20

C

Cable cross-sections ............................................58
Cable length ..................................................41, 58
Cable protection ..................................................39
Circuit connections
Add ............................................................108
Add new ......................................................72
Deleting .............................................107, 110
Entering .....................................................106
Number ......................................................100
Position in circuit diagram ..........................100339

Index08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Circuit diagram
Checking ....................................................112
Circuit connections .....................................100
Coil field ....................................................100
Contact fields .............................................100
Deleting .......................................................77
Display .................................................70, 100
Fast entry .....................................................77
Grid .....................................................70, 100
Internal processing .....................................289
Load ..........................................................308
Operating buttons ........................................86
Overview ....................................................100
Saving ................................................306, 308
Testing .................................................74, 112
Wiring ..................................................72, 106
Coil field ...........................................................100
Coil function
Contactor ...................................................119
Impulse relay ..............................................119
Latching relay ............................................120
Overview ....................................................118
COM connection ...............................................304
Connecting the setpoint potentiometer ...............46
Connecting transistor outputs .............................53340

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Index

Connection
20 A sensor ..................................................48
Analog inputs ...............................................45
Analog output ..............................................55
Contactors, relays .........................................51
Frequency generator .....................................49
High-speed counters .....................................49
Incremental encoders ...................................50
Neon bulbs ...................................................42
NET network ................................................56
Outputs ........................................................50
Proximity switch ...........................................44
Push-button actuators, switches .............40, 44
Relay outputs ...............................................51
Setpoint potentiometer .................................46
Temperature sensor ......................................47
Transistor outputs ........................................53
Connection, COM ..............................................304
Contact fields ....................................................100
Contact type ......................................................106
Change ......................................................103
Contact name .............................................103
Contact number .........................................103
Cursor buttons ...........................................111
Deleting .....................................................106
Entering ...............................................71, 103
Invert ...........................................................72
Overview ......................................................87
Counter
High-speed ...........................................49, 164
High-speed incremental encoder ................170
Counter relay .............................................153, 170
Parameters .................................161, 165, 171
Cursor display ................................................30, 86
Cycle .................................................................289

341

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Index

342

D

Debounce
Setting .......................................................276
Delay time
Input and output ........................................292
Delay times
For easy-AC ...............................................294
For easy-DC ...............................................293
Deleting retentive actual values .........................285
Device overview ..................................................18
Dimensions, easy ..............................................313

E

easy ..................................................................289
easy overview .....................................................18
EASY…-AC-.E AC expansion units ......................37
Expanding ...........................................................62
Expanding inputs ................................................62
Expanding outputs ..............................................62
Expansion
Local ............................................................63
Remote ........................................................64F

Fixing brackets ....................................................33
for .....................................................................292
Frequency counter .............................................160
Function blocks
Evaluating ..................................................290
List .............................................................332
Function relay
Counter ......................................................153
Counter relay .............................................170
Counter, high-speed ...................................164
Counter, high-speed incremental encoder ..170
Example .....................................................243
Frequency counter ......................................160
Overview ....................................................123
Time switch ........................................194, 200
Timing relays ..............................................228

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Index

I

Impulse relay .....................................................119
Increasing the input current .................................42
Incremental encoders ..................................50, 170
Input contacts ...................................................103
Inrush current limitation ......................................43
Interface ............................................................304
Interference .........................................................41
Invert .................................................................106

J

Jumps ................................................................208

L

Latching ............................................................119
Latching relay ....................................................120
LED display ..........................................................23

M

Main menu
Overview ......................................................24
Selection ......................................................21
Make contact ......................................................88
Inverting .....................................................106
Marker relay ......................................................291
Memory card
Deleting .....................................................308
Insertion .....................................................305
Menu
Changing level .............................................69
Changing the language ..............................270
Language setting ..................................65, 248
Operator guidance ........................................20
Message
INVALID PROG ...................................307, 309
MFD
Evaluating the circuit diagram ....................289
Operating modes ..........................................66
Mode
Changing .....................................................74343

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Index

Mounting
Screw fixing .................................................33
Top-hat rail ..................................................32
Mounting on a mounting plate ............................33344

N

Neon bulbs ..........................................................42
Network
Addressing .................................................249
Automatic change of the RUN and STOP mode
255
Cable ...........................................................35
Cables ..........................................................60
Changing the write repetition rate .............254
Configuring input/output devices ...............256
Connecting the NET network ........................56
Station message types ................................258
Station signs of life ....................................259
Topology ....................................................249
Transfer behaviour .....................................258
Transmission security .................................262
Network cables ...................................................60
Number formats ..................................................99

O

Operation ............................................................20
Output relay ......................................................103
Overload .....................................................54, 297
Monitoring with EASY..-D.-T.. ....................297

P

P buttons ..........................................................111
Activating and deactivating ........................277
Parameter display
Counter relay .....................................165, 171
Timing relays ..............................................161
Parameters
Change ......................................................271
Display .......................................................271
Inhibit access .............................................271

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Index

Password
Activation ...................................................266
Change ......................................................268
Deleting .....................................................268
Protection removal .....................................269
setup ..........................................................264
Pause time ........................................................254
PC connection ...................................................308
Plug (network cable) ...........................................35
Power failure .......................................................66
Power flow display ................................74, 75, 112
Program ............................................................289
Cycle ..........................................................289
Load ...........................................................303
Saving ........................................................303
R

Reed relay contacts .............................................42
Relay coil
Change ......................................................103
Coil function .......................................104, 118
Deleting .....................................................106
Entering ...............................................73, 103
RelaysConnecting the outputs ................................51
Overview ................................................94, 97
Reset .................................................................120
Retention
Setting behaviour .......................................284
Transferring behaviour ...............................286
Retention requirements
Permitted easy models ...............................284
Retentive behaviour ...........................................286
On circuit diagram transfer .........................286
Setting .......................................................284
RUN, start behaviour ...........................................66
RUN/STOP changeover ........................................74345

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Index

346

S

Sensor (20 mA) connection .................................48
Set ....................................................................120
Setpoints .............................................56, 124, 272
Setting LCD backlight ........................................281
Setting LCD contrast ..........................................281
Setting the time ................................................273
Short-circuit ................................................54, 297
Monitoring with EASY..-D.-T.. ....................297
Startup behaviour ......................................278, 280
After the circuit diagram is deleted .............279
Basic setting ..............................279, 281, 282
Possible faults ............................................280
Setting .......................................................278
With upload/download to card or PC .........279
Status display ......................................................21
Status image register ........................................290
Suppressing contact bounce ..............................292
System menu
Selection ......................................................21T

Temperature sensor connection ...........................47
Terminal mode ..................................................304
Tightening torque ................................................35
Time switch
24 hour switching ......................................200
Overnight switching ...................................198
Power failure ..............................................199
Switching at the weekend ..........................198
Switching on working days .........................197
Time overlaps .............................................199
Timing relays
On-delayed ........................................223, 232
Operating modes .......................................229
Wiring ........................................................228
Two-wire proximity switches ...............................42

08/04 AWB2528-1423GB

Index

W

Weekday setting ................................................273
WiringBackwards ..................................................291
Deleting .......................................................72
Entering .......................................................72
Relay coils ..................................................119
Rules ..........................................................119with ...................................................................297

347